Home

GT14 User`s Manual - Mitsubishi Electric

1. Grounding 24VDC 100 or less power supply 7 1 2 Grounding the GOT E About grounding Make sure to carry out the following for grounding Carry out the independent grounding if possible Apply the class D grounding Keep the grounding resistance within 100 Q or less If the independent grounding is impossible carry out the shared grounding as shown in fig 2 below Other device Other device Grounding Grounding 1000 or less 1000 or less 1 Independent ground 2 Shared grounding 3 Common grounding n Best condition Good condition Not allowed Use the cable of 2mm or more for grounding Set the grounding point closer to the GOT to make the grounding cable short as possible 7 2 7 WIRING 7 1 Power Supply Wiring E Recommended terminal shape Terminal screws should be tightened to between 0 5 to 0 8N m Terminal screws must be secured to prevent a loose connection thus avoiding a malfunction Do not tighten the terminal screw with a torque exceeding the specified torque Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions E 3 2 Terminal Solderless Terminal Solderless 6 2 Ic je Jo or less 3 2 ote DS or less 5 23 When wiring one cable t
2. e Panel thickness 2mm 4mm 0 08 0 16 or less 22 L 120 4 73 0 87 RAL 1 35 89001 e 5 80 1 1 Y Lb 6 0 24 47 1 86 56 2 17 152 5 99 Unit mm inch External dimensions of stand For angle of 75 121 4 77 254 10 0 153 6 03 260 10 24 220 8 67 Unit mm inch 1 0 i re 0 4 APPENDICES App 1 Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of serial multi drop connection unit App 2 Protective cover is installed Protective cover is removed 85232 O POWER Ord O ERROR GTO1 RS4 M GTO1 RS4 M RS 232 POWER ORD O ERROR RDA RDB SDA SDB SG f RDA RDB SDA SDB SG 5170 57 2 25 al 65 2 56 80 3 15 Unit mm inch gt
3. gt lt gt amp b Su Ls 2 SD CARD a U E 4 j g E ESI HIE ex RS i S ij LS lla D lus N oF RESET p 2 v o o Y Unit mm inch 6 INSTALLATION 6 1 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT UL cUL SYSTEM STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME lt z 7 WIRING OPTION 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimension Make holes in the panel according to the dimensions list below Also ensure 10mm of space in upper and lower parts of the panel for mounting fixtures Horizontal format If the vertical format is selected the dimension must be rotated 90 degrees 6 153 12 6 03 10 08 Y 40 0 4 or more 0 08 0 Within 2 0 08 to 4 0 16 12172 4 77 10 0 4 Cui eene Pei en whee mes Aet ues 3 Mounting Position 34 more Unit mm inch When mounting the GOT the following clearances must be maintained from other structures and devices The below diagram represents a horizontal installation The same clearances must be maintained when rotating the GOT 90 degrees clockwise for a vertical installation Installation Environment In the presence of radiated noise or heat gen
4. o N RFID SD card Refer to P Stand Refer to a a controller 8 1 gt 87 Commercially Et B ues available lt o cS Panel mounted USB mous o ae Refer to pea USB port Refer to Commercia ha y 8 2 extension 8 10 available n Serial USB multi drop Refer to keyboard connection 8 9 Commercial unit Se availab Personal 5 conversion Refer to oe i lt 2 adapter 8 8 3 availabl o 55 RS 232 485 2 x Z4 S n Printer amp CS signal _ Refer to Comme conversion 8 11 alab adapter 1 Only hard copy of the screen can be printed 2 2 System Equipment STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL 1 Explanation of the GOT model name GT14 55 QTBDE z Communication E Built in Ethernet 2 interface 5 a Power type DC24V 5 2 Panel color type B Black Display device type L monochrome black and white T TFT color High intensity wide angle view M TFT monochrome white black Resolution Q 320x240 QVGA E m Display color type 0 Monochrome black and white 16 scales 5 65535 colors Screen size type 5 57 GOT1000 series GT14 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 Explanation of the option model name x 50 Dedicated for 5 7 16 Dedicated for GT16 15 Dedicated for GT15 14 Dedicated for GT14 11
5. Number Item Description 1 Select drive The target drive can be selected Even if SD card is not installed this message appears 2 Kind Indicates type of the displayed namg file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc C 13 2 6 Logging information operation 6 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 7 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 8 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files 1 About the displayed file The files other than that for logging are not displayed on the logging information screen 2 Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 57 13 1 4 Display file 13 54 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Logging information operation 1 Display operation of logging information 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL To
6. 48 1 89 Unit mm inch APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter 36 1 42 0 67 j i i i Unit mm inch APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 3 E External dimensions of communication cable GT01 C30R4 25P Unit mm inch 16 500 97 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 0 63 2 o d 7 S i 0297 i E 8 gt E q E lt M26 E M2 6 gt GT01 CLILILIRA4 25P 16 50 1 97 L 53 2 09 16 0 637 F 0 637 1 d 7 mm p 0 28 ei R LIT T Jj alls iO re d M2 6 M2 6 gt Y Value of DOI Length L mm inch 100 10000 200 20000 300 30000 GT01 CLILILIRA4 8P 16 50 1 97 L 40 1 58 1 lt gt gt fs 25 33 0 52
7. Copy files on Windows Standard CF card USB drive KESS USB memory USB memory when installed SD card when installed in GOT Inserting when installed in PC in PC SD card when installed in GOT Removing Install Write gt Upload Read Item Data type Storage location Alarm data Extended alarm log file and alarm log file Recipe data Advanced recipe file Recipe file Built in SD card A drive Internal SRAM D drive Logging Logging Logging file USB drive E drive Image file Hard copy function 13 2 1 The USB memory can be used from Utility Por Checking the available memory of storage location When saving resource data check available memory of storage location before use Memory capacity of internal SRAM D drive is 512kbytes Use the built in SD card A drive if the available memory is not enough 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 2 OS version confirmation Confirm the OS version carefully when install BootOS and Standard monitor OS When OS is installed GOT checks and compares the OS version automatically 1 When install BootOS When the BootOS to be installed has the older major version GOT displays the installation disapproving message to cancel the installation so that the older version may not be written Even when the version of the BootOS to be installed has the same o
8. Make measurement with thermometer or Other portions 0 to 55 C For use in control panel temperature 1 9 7 hygrometer inside control panel is ambient environment Ambient ae Measure corrosive gas 10 to 90 RH temperature humidity Atmosphere No corrosive gas 24VDC Measure voltage across 2 Power supply voltage check ieminals 20 4 to 26 4VDC Change supply power Looseness Move module Should be mounted firmly Retighten screws Mounting 3 status Foreign material Visual check No foreign matter sticking Remove clean attachment Loose terminal Retighten screws with screwdriver Not loose Retighten terminal screws screws 4 Connection Proximate status solderless Visual check Proper intervals Correct terminals Loose A Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing screws connectors Check GOT internal battery voltage status in Time Setting amp Display of the Replace with new battery when the ili t battery hed th 5 Battery Utility No alarm displayed abend econ arte gt 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions specified life span even if battery voltage is not displayed 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 1 Daily Inspection 17 3 Cleaning Method Use the GOT always in a clean condition To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent For the display operation of the Clean screen refer to the followi
9. 8 OPTION 8 7 8 5 Protective Cover for Oil The corner on the left is hung the oil cover is hung 3 The oil cover was hung and the edge of the oil cover is from A side to D side on the starting point sequentially sequentially obtained and obtain the oil cover to cover rubber packing parts in the back of GOT of the front panel From A side to D side in the direction of the arrow 4 Please confirm all surroundings Check whether the rubber packing is fitted correctly into the groove on the under side of the GOT front panel and then whether the protective cover for oil securely covers the rubber packing part to prevent invasion of liquids into the board Make sure that corners of protective cover for oil match those of GOT front 5 Mount the GOT onto the control panel When the control panel is dirty clean the control panel The Panel cut panel cutting dimensions and mounting screw Protectivecover dimensions tightening torque with the protective cover for oil are for oil the same as those without the cover ENT Mounting metal fixture Control panel 1 2 Precautions on installation Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Specified torque range 0 3 to 0 5N m Undertightening can cause a drop Also undertightening can disable waterproof or oil proof effect Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunct
10. na docte i e eee 8 13 8 9 5 Caution for compliance with EMC Directive 8 13 8 10 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension ssssssssssseene nenne nennen 8 14 8 10 1 Applicable panel mounted USB port extension 8 14 SEL Pans NaMe EE 8 14 8 10 3 Installing procedure 8 14 8 11 RS 232 485 Signal Conversion 8 16 8 11 1 Applicable RS 232 485 signal conversion 8 16 8 11 2 Installing procedure of RS 232 485 signal conversion 8 16 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 1 OU ES UNO sioe eet ora TTEA rodeada 9 1 9 2 Utility Function LISt oir e rer tt ento diei tto isan de ee ttn dk EET ER Pe een 9 2 SEEMS RE 9 4 9 3 1 Display operation of main 9 6 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration sse een nennen enne nennen nnns 9 8 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change sssssssee eene ennemis 9 9 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 Gommi nication Setting
11. nr 5s 9 2 le BootOS or Standard monitor OS installation SD card 2 GT Designer3 gt or GOT USB memory OS file BootOS or Standard write monitor OS installation Install the SD SD card or card or USB When GOT is remote installed easily using the SD card or USB memory GT Designer3 USB memory 1 memory in GO SD card 3 GOT gt o GOT USB memory OS file BootOS or Standard upload Monitor OS installation Install OS from GOT to GOT using SD card or USB memory E SS SD card or Install the SD USB 1 card or USB y memory in GOT 1 When installing the BootOS and standard monitor OS standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance For the installation which uses GT Designer3 refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals For the installation which uses GOT refer to the following 3 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 1 9 1 Utility Execution z m D gt E COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTIO
12. 13 66 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 9 USB memory 8 3 USB mouse keyboard setting 11 15 Utility Call Key Setting 11 11 UTILITY FUNCTION ene 9 1 App 7 Displays nU M op e 9 4 Functioty Bist cor Ee o tees 9 2 IW Window move buzzer volume setting 11 6 11 8 WIRING 7 1 Power Supply 7 2 Wiring Inslde cider RR DR RES 7 5 Wiring outside mette 7 5 Index 2 REVISIONS Sub The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Number Oct 2011 JY997D44801 A First edition Jan 2012 JY997D44801 B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 40S GT14 RS2T4 9P type RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor compatible Jan 2012 JY997D44801 C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 40S UL cUL Standards supported Apr 2012 JY997D44801 D Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 45X The backup restoration setting function is added Jun 2012 JY997D44801 E Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 54G Partial changes of general specifications frequency Connection of printer compatible Ethernet status check compatible Company name changes from YAMATAKE to AZBIL from PANASONIC EW to PANASONIC Sep
13. 5 USB interface USB nh communicating with PC Device Ee For OS installation project data download FA transparent USB i tal protecti 6 i Opens closes when the USB interface is used cover z lt E z 7 2 o 2 2 H a 4 PARTS NAME 4 1 4 1 Front Panel 4 2 Back Panel 4 5 7 8 Battery cover opened X T gt oe 6 o 3 CARD 7 1 4 2 es 9 Power supply terminal layout INPUT J 13 24 0 BATTERY RESET Wy TA zi fd INPUT Hr TT fio es 200 H lela ELEC 0 C d ds gt L rT 12 3 11 No Name Description 1 RS 232 interface ror communicating with controller PLC microcomputer board bar code reader RFID etc or PC OS installation project data download transparent D sub 9pin male 2 RS 422 485 interface For communicating with controller PLC microcomputer board etc D sub 9pin female 3 USB interfac
14. t retient ovis 14 3 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 12 SPECIFICATIONS ier ean 3 1 General Specifications 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 2 Power Supply Specifications 3 3 SRAM control er ertt ee REFER Ene 13 68 Stand 8 10 Standard monitor 16 1 System Alarm 18 11 18 13 System Alarm 14 19 Index 1 INDEX SYSTEM 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 1 System 2 1 System 14 1 Time Setting and 12 1 Clock display inec 12 3 Clock aia 12 2 Touch panel check 14 12 Transparent Mode Setting 11 18 Transportation Precautions App 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 U UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 1 USB device status display
15. 13 73 13 2 12 Operator information management eene ennemis 13 74 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK Jm EDU e c 14 1 14 1 1 System MONO iir teat tec re n viaa te e d adea p be ER da 14 1 14 122 oA liSbeditor iai de te Eb arte Seed a aa ta ae tee ee ati 14 1 14 71 35 GNERE arg cite IE UBER 14 1 14 1 4 Backup restoration eii etl ee P d e etit the pi i all said dates 14 2 14 2 Self Check ice see e els clan tee ac le A eee eds cada seen a eee aden 14 3 14 21 Memory Check cctv re i eH RR ERES ete 14 3 14 2 2 Drawing Check T EEA dace de 14 6 142 3 FOMM HECK cite pt mee a igi esatta icc me EL 14 10 14 2 4 Touch panel Check e ER e ee td 14 12 14 2 3 iei cR HIER Ee dr eed Pace o e e eb Leod 14 14 14 2 6 Ethernet status check 14 17 14 3 System Alarmi eei ene te a alid e peccet e beat Lad 14 19 JL Wcoi ciilu e sail 14 21 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor A
16. Product name Model name Contents GT14 50PSCB Clear 5 sheets GT14 50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets Protective sheet 5 7 protective sheet GT14 50PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets GT14 50PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Drawing software Sold separately Product name Model name Contents SWLIDNC GTD3 E TUE Drawing software for GOT1000 series 0 indicates the version GT Designer3 PC connection cable Sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Contents GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GOT USB Mini B PC USB Project data transfer cable GT01 C30R2 9S 3m GOT D Sub 9pin PC D Sub 9 Panel mounted USB port extension Sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Contents Panel mounted USB port i GT14 C10EXUSB 4S 1m Panel mounted USB port extension compatible with IP67f extension Serial multi drop connection unit Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Serial multi drop connection GT01 RS4 M For GOT multi drop connection Connector conversion adapter Sold separately Contents Model name Product name Connector conversion adapter GT10 9PT5S For GOT multi drop connection 2 6 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 System Equipment Bar code reader RFID controller Sold separately Model name Product name Contents Bar code reader Commercially available bar code reader B RFID controller Commerci
17. c Reset or power ON OFF the PLC The GOT may have malfunctioned CPU temporarily due to noise Restored Not restored Proceed to d d Power the GOT and PLC CPU ON OFF simultaneously Restored Not restored Proceed to e Action Take the action of 4 h e Connect the cable again Restored Not restored Proceed to f The cable connection may be faulty Securely connect the cable If an error occurs again proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation f Reinstall the project data Restored O Not restored Proceed to g Data may have been destroyed by an action such as powering the GOT OFF g Reinstall the OS during the installation of project data or Restored OS O Not restored Proceed to h Do not power the GOT OFF while transferring data If an error occurs again proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation h Take the action described in the Action column Restored O Not restored Proceed to i The GOT may have malfunctioned temporarily due to noise Take the action with referring to GOT installation status check sheet 18 4 i The GOT is not restored even by performing a to h Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation 1 When powering the GOT ON again OFF ON power OFF the PLC before that 5 Troubled product investigation When malfunction of the GOT is not imp
18. intermittent X YandZ Vibration resistance JISB3502and 8 4 to 150Hz 9 8 52 o vibration directions IEC 61131 2 Under 5 to 8 4Hz 1 75mm n continuous Tn 8 4 to 150Hz 4 9 52 vibration Shock resistance Conforms to JIS B 3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions atmosphere Must be free of lamp black corrosive gas ammabile gas or excessive amount of electro gt conductive dust particles and must be no direct sunlight Same as for saving 5 Operating altitude 1 2000 m 6562 ft max E Installation location Inside control panel Overvoltage category 2 or less Pollution degree 2 or less Cooling method Self cooling Grounding Class D grounding 1002 or less to be connected to the panel when grounding is not possible 1 Do not use or store the GOT under pressures higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Failure to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL When the air inside the control panel is purged by pressurization the surface sheet may be lifted by high pressure As a result the touch panel may be difficult to press and the sheet may be peeled off 2 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises Category Il
19. 2 z o 2 oa a p 9 9 DISPLAY AND Main menu GOT setup Operation 9 3 Utility Display setup Operation emis Buzzer volume 5 Window move buzzer EATI RE Security setting Setting Uti ligy call key Setting Key s vitv Spee GOT setup Operation Utility call key Menu call key Menu call key x TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Pressing time 0 SEC FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touch buttons to set for the utility call key Pressing time is effective only in case one point GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 11 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation E Setting operation of utility call key Menu call key 1 Touch or displayed at the 4 corners of the setting screen The button repeats lt P with every touch Set the corner to be set to a key position to e For the key position O or 1 point only can be set Pressing time is effective OK only in case one point Menu call key 2 When setting 1 point specify the time to switch to the utility in case of keeping pressing the k
20. Behavior of duplicate IPs Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that j of the GOT is added to the network afterwards it i OS information Installing or uploading OS displaying OS property checking OS data O O x Deleting or copying alarm log files o x Alarm information Converting alarm log files in G1A format CSV or TXT format O x x Project information Downloading uploading deleting or copying project files displaying project x file property checking project file data Hard copy information Deleting or copying hard copy files changing hard copy file names O x x Converting advanced recipe files in G1P format CSV or TXT format Converting advanced recipe files in CSV or TXT format G1P format Deleting copying or moving advanced recipe files creating a new advanced Advanced Recipe information recipe file O x x Program Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders changing advanced recipe data control folder names creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing reading or matching record data and deleting device values with the advanced recipe record list Converting logging files in G1L format CSV or TXT format O x x Logging information Deleting copying or moving logging files changing logging file names O x x Deleting logging folders or creating a new logging folder Memory card format Formatting a SD card or USB memory internal SRAM O x Memory information Displaying the av
21. RUE 42 Back neue a tec reete t bc tie e a ee 4 3 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 ULE CULSSTANG and Sis vu te acte de e a be tete m eter pied Ur eed 5 2 EMO Ee D E ite ad 5 2 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive ccccccccceeceeeeeeeececcccceeceeeeeeeeeeesecaeaaeaeeeeeeeneess 5 2 2 Directive Compliant System Configuration essen 5 2 3 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 6 INSTALLATION 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting 6 1 0 2 Panel Cutting DIMENSION beast ie PE dete dde 6 2 6 3 Mounting Position iiis annee tdi abite eee enn ene cde en du nn dena AA dne ign 6 2 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle sse 6 3 6 5 Installatiori Procedure ee Coe ee eee e e e bn rhe dav dinate daa b 6 4 7 WIRING GP Powersupply Wiring dp RR RR AR t A ee RR lt 7 2 TAA Wiring example ein bei t e ete ere ce Ye Eu Pe eid ieee 7 2 4 1 2 Grounding Me GO T cic eicere HD d ERR EL a ed 7 2 7 1 3 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy seenn 7 3 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel ssssssssssseeeeee enne nnnm ne
22. L gt This section 8 Create L gt This section 9 L gt This section 10 to 13 Touching x button closes the screen 13 2 Various Data Control 13 37 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 2 G1P CSV conversion operation G1P TXT conversion operation Advanced recipe file G1P file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on personal computer Advanced Recipe Information PROJECT1 indName Size DIR 2 GIP 1 DIR PROJECT 1 GIP JARPOOO1 B84kB 386 1584 Please select destination ENS Em File conversion from GIP to CSV Source file ARPO001 61P Change to ARPOO01 CSV Change file format Example Dialog box if the GTP CSV button is touched 5 File conversion from GIP to CSV Source file ARP0001 G1P Change to ARPOOO1 CSY Do you want to overwrite the file Touch and select the G1P file to convert into a CSV file or a Unicode text file Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type CSV file GTP CSV button Unicode text file G1P TXT button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button Whil
23. p EE 2 p I E D CH No Driver 7 RS422 485 1 v MELSEC FX v Detail Setting a VF 2 88232 9 Host PC 2 F 3 USB 3 Host PC Detail Settin lt E o WF4 Ethemet 0 v None Detail Setting Ban For details refer to the following gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 When Communication Setting has not been downloaded When Communication Setting has not been downloaded using drawing software make the communication settings in the drawing software or on the utility screen of the GOT COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 3 10 1 Communication setting 10 1 4 Communication setting operation E Channel Driver assign operation The following describes how to operate the Channel Driver assign The example of changing to the direct CPU connection Communication driver A QnA L QCPU LJ71C24 QJ71C24 for the GOT of the computer link connection Communication driver AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 is used 10 4 Before starting operation After Communication Setting is executed the GOT automatically restarts If the project data is downloaded GOT starts monitoring the communication device after restarting Execute this setting after carefully confirming the safety Communication Setting Standard I F Setting ChNo RS422 485 1 RJ 10C24 MELDAS C
24. 907 setup Time setting amp display Program datagontral ERI Debug amp self cj Memory informaton Program data control Memory information Memory information lash memory empty area size A Built in SD card 3861232 K byte C Flash Memory User area 9187 K byte OS area 4474 K byte D Internal SRAM 505 K byte Boot drive empty area size 18583 K byte ll Display example of Memory information Memory information Flash memory empty area size A Built in SD card 3861232 K byte C Flash Memory User area 9187 K byte OS area 4474 K byte Description Indicates the memory space of each drive available for the user to store files or folders The A Built in SD card is not displayed when SD card is not installed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed 2 Boot drive empty area size Indicates the empty area size of boot drive specified by the user 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 65 13 2 Various Data Control UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt amp a z Ed ns O me ae oS Q e 5 a iS Ed SS oS m DLO ase 2 290 TH 5 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF
25. COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 2 9 USB device status display E Function of USB device status display This function displays a list of the USB device connection status in the GOT Also this screen is used to remove the USB device from GOT E Display operation of USB device status display Main menu Program Data control gt 9 3 Utility Display lata ER Debug amp self cl Program data control 13 66 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control USB device status display operation 1 When the USB device is installed to the screen shown left is displayed 2 USB mass storage is displayed in Device and Stop button is displayed in Attach 3 Touching the Stop button displays the dialog box Do you want to stop USB device shown left Touching the OK button execute the preparation of the USB devices removal Touching the Cancel button cancels the preparation of USB devices removal 4 When the preparation of removal is ready the dialog USB device has been stopped box shown left is displayed 9 Touching the OK button closes the dialog box COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL USB mouse keyboard recognition When using the USB mouse keyboard install USB mouse keyboard of the extended function OS to the GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL
26. Confirm whether any image file of invalid format is stored 18 18 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm Error Channel No Error message Action Bags Error occurred while executing the auto repeat function of the touch Switch object Confirm the following Auto repeat error Confirm 540 Confirm that the other system error has not occurred during auto x system information repeat Confirm that any error information is not stored in the system information GS during auto repeat The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the specified range 570 Recipe device points too large 2 M 2 Put the number of the set points of the recipe device within the specified range 571 Capacity shortage of user There is no empty area space in D drive x memory RAM Format the D drive in the memory to secure free area Advanced Recipe cannot be executed for advanced recipe file with 581 Abnormal Advanced recipe file incorrect contents Delete the advanced recipe file from the SD card or x USB memory Cannot generate advanced recipe file Confirm the following and execute recipe processing again Cannot generate Advanced M 582 reciba fie Confirm whether the SD card or USB memory is installed x ipe file P Confirm whether the SD card access switch of the GOT is ON Confirm the available memory of the SD card or USB memo
27. Restore default settings 1 Channel selection tab Channels can be switched Switching to the channel which does not have the Ethernet setting is not available is displayed on the tab of the channel whose setting is changed 2 Ethernet setting item The contents of the Ethernet setting configured in drawing software are displayed The setting of the host station can be changed L gt M Change of host 3 Restore default settings Touching this button cancels the change of the setting and returns the setting to the status when the project data was written 1 How to cancel the change of the setting in the Ethernet setting screen Cancel the settings changed in the Ethernet setting screen with the Restore default settings button The changed settings remain until they are canceled with the Restore default settings button The changed settings are not canceled even if writing the project data or OS to the GOT When the project data is written to the GOT without canceling the changed settings those changed settings are reflected to the Ethernet setting of the written project data If the written project data does not have a channel with same Ethernet settings as that of the channel changed in Ethernet setting screen the changed settings are not reflected 2 Range where the settings changed in the Ethernet setting screen are reflected The settings changed in the Ethernet setting screen are valid in the GOT
28. Built in SD card Copy 2 The display depends on the status of copy Copy destination destination and setup Operate with following the displayed dialog box Because of the copy destination is Boot drive Project data and setup condition can t copy After execute disable setup please execute copy operation ox 3 After copying OS and data the dialog box for notifying the completion appears Touching the OK button closes the dialog box Copy is completed 13 90 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control Estimation of processing time The time required for the processing depends on conditions such as OS data capacity and file structure Reference value When the capacity is 4 Mbytes Around 6 seconds When the capacity is 12 Mbytes Around 18 seconds 5 Precautions for operation a Copying project data If the Boot source drive and copy destination drive for project data is the same the project data cannot be copied If the drives are the same cancel the setup b When project data are copied to the GOT If OS or project data is copied to the GOT using the SD card or USB memory created with GOT data package acquisition the utility setting is also copied Check each utility setting after copying to the GOT and change the setting according to need c SD card or USB memory to be used When performing GOT data package acquisition do not store other data
29. Check missing bit and color visually lt i 282 855 Light blue Be SES ose To b Basic figurecheck screen a Touching the upper right part of the screen at the final color white screen displays the following b Basic 25 figure check screen EO 203 Oa ask b Basic figure check 288 Check whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses 7 The basic figure drawn has 4 types 1 Filled circle 2 Line 3 Rectangle 4 Ellipse To Pattern 1 of c Move check among screen Le 1 0 a 2 Ed 9 3 n a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 7 14 2 Self Check Move check among screens Pattern 1 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal r Fans Pattern 2 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check Pattern 3 Shape transformation color check The overlapped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal UTILITY FUN
30. o 2 a e 25 LIN l aog TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 3 Transparent Mode Setting E Function of the transparent mode When using the multi channel function the channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be specified For the multi channel function and FA transparent function refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 1 2 Ch No The channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be set Default 1 E Display operation of Transparent mode Main menu GOT setup 9 3 Utility Display GOT setup Transparent mode Transparent mode Transparent mode Chio E Setting operation of transparent mode x 1 Touching the transparent Ch No numerical part ChNo on the left displays the screen to select the D communication driver 1 Select the channel to execute the FA transparent function 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button returns the screen to the GOT Setup screen 11 18 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION
31. 13 2 Various Data Control 1 2 a b c Touch the Add button The Operator information edit screen is displayed and then touch an item to be edited a OperatorName b OperatorID c Level d Password e Make a permanent password f Use ext auth ID g Ext auth ID Touch the OperatorName and then the Operator name input dialog box is displayed Input an operator name Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key Touch the OperatorID and then the Operator ID input dialog box is displayed Input an operator ID When the input is completed touch the Enter key Touch the level and then the Operator level input dialog box is displayed Input an operator level When the input is completed touch the key When the level of the operator being login is changed during editing the operator information a new level is not reflected until you log out of the GOT once and log in the GOT again 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL d For changing passwords during editing touch the password The New password input dialog box is displayed and then input a password When the input is completed touch the Enter key 1 ITY UIT OP displayed AISIDIFIGIBIJIKIL Input the sa
32. 2 Each folder is created automatically when a file is installed downloaded or uploaded The USB memory cannot be activated direc 5 132 1 OS information 4 folder names and file names can be set at System Settings in System Environment of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 5 A serial number is automatically added to file names 6 Each function does not provide direct storage to the E drive 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 2 Various Data Control 2 o 13 2 1 OS information gt i F E Function of OS information E Each file name folder name of BootOS and OS Standard monitor OS PC communication driver and Option OS by which each drive A Built in SD card C Built in flash memory E USB memory holds can be displayed in lists Installation and uploading of the files are also possible Function Description Reference E E z oe Displaying file folder data The file folder type name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 6 13 7 8 zoz OS files written in the A drive Built in SD card E drive USB drive can be installed in the C g Install A 13 8 ES drive Built in flash memory ozo All OS files in the C drive Built in flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Built in SD card Upload E drive USB drive 129 o Property display Displays the proper
33. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt amp a z Ed ns 0 O me oS Q e 5 a iS Ed SS m DLO ase 2 290 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 52 2 Precautions for operation a Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the folder is created Therefore do not pull out the SD card while the Processing message is on the screen after SD card access switch has been turned OFF b While GOT is accessing to other file Alarm data etc When folder file processing for the recipe is executed while the GOT is in access to other file SD card access LED ON the GOT executes folder file processing for the Advanced Recipe after the processing for other file has completed Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of advanced recipe folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen GOO Estimation of processing time The process may take time depending on the setting
34. CONTENTS SAFETY PREGCAUTIONS states reto m Eh as ender etd epa ea 1 INTRODUCTION carrs iiia eee HP ae cd a e i 7 CONTENTO eit tentabat e Pte ed teu rt mte Ree Ee eee 7 MANUALS sx ate i de ta et ats Mao Li fea ta A 13 QUICK REFERENCE tie ied eec ie Reduce Lee te de ce d nte e ue dia e ae A 13 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC nennen rennen nnne nnns A 15 HOW TO READB THIS MANDUAL itio e rne cette iren tT eee cune dr rte tal a ee HEU ed ced A 20 1 OVERVIEW LIEU p D 1 2 1 1 4 Rough procedure dede ene dee A dae nda id 1 3 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 2 System stes nennt nsn nen 22 1 GOVT GTT EE 222 OPMOMN TS C ees eo wea 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 General Specificatioris ene rer eene dan ote andes Seah cad ened 3 2 Performance Specifications d ded i et d dece tec M E e bad D 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 4 PARTS NAME AA Front Panel nin Ee e ame Me pede RR E D dA EP EN
35. GOT800 Series E Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Bus connection unit Abbreviation of GOT 800 series Description GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 3 Interface converter unit GT15 75lIF900 Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M Connection Conversion Adapter GT10 9PT5S RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter GT14 RS2T4 9P 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 751F900 set 8 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75lIF900 set E Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Printer unit Description GT15 PRN Video input unit GT16M V4 GT15V 75V4 RGB input unit Video RGB unit GT16M R2 GT15V 75R1 Video RGB input unit GT16M V4R1 GT15V 75VAR1 RGB output unit GT16M ROUT GT15V 75ROUT Multimedia unit GT16M MMR CF c
36. 0 99 1 3 E mm 0 99 1 3 e z Value of DOO Length L mm inch 10 1000 30 3000 100 10000 200 20000 300 30000 App 4 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions GT01 C30R2 25P E 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 16 0 65 0 63 fo E os E E EIE TMT 5 E ai E z i E hs lt 4 40UNC E M2 6 GT01 C30R2 9S 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 50 1 97 i f o q Q6 ff ge e HE a lt 4 40UNC 4 40UNC gt GT01 C30R2 6P 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 Je 400 58 1 T 20x28 0 52 E 7 Pe 0 28 00000 FAH i lt 4 400 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions 35 1 38 App 5 App 6 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function a 2 The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type s 3 z Moreover there are the function which can be set with drawing software and the function which cannot be set 5 uo O Applicable x Not applica
37. Now installing BootOS 4 Reboot 5 Install the USB memory in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the USB interface of GOT Display the data control function screen Utility on the GOT and install BootOS standard monitor OS Do not pull out the USB memory or power off the GOT while install execution The GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed After confirming normal restart display the USB device status screen and remove the USB memory from the USB interface of GOT 13 2 9 USB device status display 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS z Standard Monitor OS 5 2 gt E BoctOS installation When installing BootOS GOT compares the version of the BootOS to be installed with the version of BootOS which 2 is already installed If the major version of BootOS to be installed is old execute the following operations to prevent it from being S rewritten E When installing from GT Designer3 a message is displayed on the PC screen Follow the instructions in that E F message 28 E zoz 1 When only BootOS is stored in the SD card or USB memory 8z9 1 The message indicating disabled installation is Boot OS hes been already installed displayed Existing OS Ver 05 27 00 AM 8 Expected OS V
38. 3 The screen switches to the Communication Detail Ethernet setting screen 2 joco 1 7 PU Set communication parameters from this screen GOT Port No COMM 5019 D L 5014 For the setting change operation refer to the Gateway 090 0 10 followin Subnet Mask Peete 9 3 TIMES Startup Time SEC Timeout Time SEC 577 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Delay Time x10ms Communication parameter setting by drawing software Select Common Settings Communication Settings from GT Designer3 to enter the communication parameters for each communication driver When changing the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 9 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10 2 3 Display contents of Communication Detail setting The contents of communication detail setting varies according to driver type This section explains setting items different from the communication detail setting of the drawing software For setting items other than described in this section refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals E Communication detail setting of host modem On the communication detail setting screen of host modem the communica
39. 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 8 OPTION 8 1 SD Card The SD card is used to transmit the OS or project data and to save the data of the alarm history function For details refer to the following lt 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 8 1 1 Applicable SD card The following SD cards are applicable for GOT Model name Description L1MEM 2GBSD SD memory card 2GB L1MEM 4GBSD SDHC memory card 4GB Commercially available SD A Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to Operation Check Results of Third Party SD Cards on GT14 Model Hime T P 0089 separately available or contact your local distributor 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card Install remove the SD card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or SD card access switch is OFF B Installing 1 Set the SD card access switch of the GOT to OFF make sure On ACCESS OFF ON SD CARD that the SD card access LED turns off When the SD card access LED turns off the SD card can be installed even during the GOT power on 2 Insert the SD card into the SD card interface with its front o SD card side nameplate side outside front face 3 Turn the SD card access switch on gt After the SD card access switch is turned on the SD card can be used
40. 8 3 3 Battery replacement procedure COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 3 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 4 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1 Time Setting and Display 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL The display of OS project data or alarm data which is written in the GOT or SD card and the data transmission between GOT and SD card USB memory are possible The format of the SD card USB memory is also possible 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 1 Data type and storage location E System The data storage location and transferring write read route for each data type are shown below Also the data storage locations are shown below Project data Write C drive Built in flash memory PC GT Designer3 BootOS install Download Project data Project data Copy files on Windows l l l Y Project data A drive E drive Built in SD card USB drive Upload Writ Project data SA E V Inserting Removing SD card USB memory SD card when installed in GOT when installed in USB memory when installed in PC when installed in PC Install Write Upload Read The data of the Flash Memory Project data etc can be saved eve
41. 8 9 3 Installation E installed with DIN Install the serial multi drop connection unit with its hook 1 place using the DIN rail Applicable DIN rail DIN46277 width 35mm Install the DIN rail with screws at intervals of 150mm B Directly installed to panel Install the serial multi drop connection unit to the panel using 4 5mm holes 2 places 8 12 8 OPTION 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 94 Parts name 1 Protective cover is installed Protective cover is removed 2 GTO1 RS4 M O GTO1 RS4 M 5 z m gt 8 E O power 4 O Power ON gt 85 o ZS o Sea O ERROR Omen o d 3 Pay 28 a ow or 7 5 ao y T 2 NEN gt 2 4 5 no 57 2 25 65 2 56 9 z X o Es n 0 Unit mm inch gt lt Description 1 Installation hole for the main unit Installation hole 2 4 5 x a POWER Lit in green when the power is properly supplied SD Lit in green when the data is being sent to PLC 2 LED RD Lit in green when the data is being received from PLC ii lt gt Lit or blinking depending the status 2 5 ne 22 3 Terminating resistor
42. A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 is assigned COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING f After confirming touch the OK button 8 Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings Ethernet Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External de connection 1 Touch channel number specification menu BOX to be set 2 The cursor for the channel number specification menu BOX is displayed Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerical input is displayed 3 Input the channel number from the keyboard and touch Enter key and the value is defined Simultaneously the name of the communication driver corresponding to the channel number assigned by drawing software is displayed in the driver display BOX Standard F Setting ChNo B Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device ll Communication detail setting switching operation If the driver display BOX is touched on the communication setting screen or Ethernet I F assign screen the screen switches to the detailed setting screen of the related controller device 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 5 10 1 Communication setting E Assign Ethernet I F operation The following describes how to operate the Ethernet I F assign The setting operation is same as that of the communication setting screen 1
43. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the dialog box shown left is displayed and the operator information stored in the GOT is exported to a SD card file name AUTHINF G1U 13 84 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control ll Password change 1 Password change function The passwords to be used for the operator authentication can be changed For the password change log into the GOT in advance with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed 2 Display operation of password change Main menu Debug amp self check Operator setting menu 53 perator management j Ti tting amp displ AY System alarm display 7 ime setting amp display Bey Pegguord change Progran data control ERR cor start time uj information management Touch Password change Debug amp self Operator information check management Password change Password chan Input a present password Old password COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 85 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Password change operation 1 Log into the GOT with the operator name corresponding to th
44. Contents 2 name length d E GT09 C30R40101 9P 3m GT09 C100R40101 9P 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication unit serial communication GT09 C200R40101 9P 20m board GT09 C300R40101 9P 30m 2 RS 422 cable GT09 C30R40103 5T 3m pra E GT09 C100R40103 5T 10m a For connecting GOT to serial communication board a GT09 C200R40103 5T 20m 2 GT09 C300R40103 5T 30m GT09 C30R40102 9P 3m GT09 C100R40102 9P 10m RS 422 cable For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit communication board GT09 C200R40102 9P 20m GT09 C300R40102 9P 30m oO z GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m ing GOT OMRON PLC serial communication unit communication board serial communication board RS 232 cabl cabe GT09 C30R20102 25S 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable GT09 C30R20103 25P 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit 2 o LT 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 3 2 2 System Equipment Connection cables for KEYENCE PLCs Sold separately Model name cable Contents name length GT09 C30R41101 5T 3m GT09 C100R41101 5T 10m RS 422 cable For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit GT09 C200R41101 5T 20m GT09 C300R41101 5T 30m GT09 C30R21101 6P 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC RS 232 cable GT09 C30R21102 9S 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit GT09 C30R21103 3T 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit Connection cables
45. Copy file name shown left SNAPOOO1 BMP Copy destination Copy 5 Touch OK button File is already exist If there is a file of the same name in the copy Overwrite now destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy 6 Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the copy COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 7 When the copy is completed the dialog of Copy is completed completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 31 13 2 Various Data Control 4 Rename operation Renames the selected file 5280KB 3862528KB IMGOOOH lt gt 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1031 After IMG0001 BMP Change filename Process completed 1 Touch and select the file to change the name Touching Rename button displays the screen shown left Input the file name to be changed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Touching OK button starts renaming file When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 32 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 5 Advanced recipe information 2 Lr o
46. For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the logging information screen the files other than logging files are not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in SD card or USB memory by using personal computer etc 2 Precautions for operation b Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the folder is created Therefore do not pull out the SD card while the Processing message is on the screen after SD card access switch has been turned OFF While GOT is accessing to other file Alarm data etc When folder file processing for the logging is executed while the GOT is in access to other files SD card access LED ON the GOT executes folder file processing for the logging after the processing for other files is completed Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of the logging folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 7 Memory card form
47. K Key sensitivity setting 11 6 11 8 L 11 1 11 3 Logging information 13 53 M MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 1 Memory card 13 63 Memory check 14 3 Memory information 13 65 O Opening screen 11 1 11 4 OS information ec rette ete rennen pel 13 5 OS version confirmation 13 3 P Panel Cutting Dimension 6 2 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension 8 14 PARTS NAME tit d e ied gd 4 1 Back Panel trente 4 2 Front Panel rtt nha a idee 4 1 zs 4 3 Periodic Inspection 17 2 Project 13 17 Protective Cover for 8 7 Protective Sheet sssssssssssssssssss 8 6 R RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter 8 16 S Screen save backlight 11 1 11 4 Screen save time ctae iesus 11 1 11 4 SD Caid 8 1 Security level 11 9 Self
48. Main Menu Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display j System alarm display Program data control GOT start dime Touch GOT start time Debug amp self check Start time Start time GOT Start Time Start Time 06 28 2011 TUE 11 54 37 06 28 2011 TUE 12 01 43 Operating hours Current Time Oh O6s 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 21 14 4 GOT start time E Display of GOT start time Start time GOT Start Time Start Time 06 28 2011 TUE 11 54 37 06 28 2011 TUE 12 01 43 Current Time Operating hours Oh 06s Item Description Start Time Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change Current Time Displays the current time Displays operating hours of the GOT The displayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change When powering off or reset restarting the GOT the operating hours is cleared ZIAR 1 To display correct time Set the clock of GOT 57 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions When the clock has not been set the correct time is not displayed at Start Time and Current Time Operating hours 2 Time displayed at Operating hours Operating hours is displayed irrespective of Start Time and Current Time When changing the clock of the GOT
49. Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings and setting the maximum number of backup data Trigger backup settings Setting the CPU No setting at backup to YES or NO Behavior of duplicate IPs Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards License management Displaying the screen for license registration and deregistration Time setting amp display Selecting a base clock Displaying the clock current time Setting the clock current time Displaying the battery status 12 OS information Installing or uploading OS displaying OS property checking OS data 13 2 1 Alarm information Deleting and copying alarm log files Converting alarm log files in G1A format CSV or TXT format 13 2 2 Project information Downloading uploading deleting or copying project files displaying project file property checking project file data 13 2 3 Hard copy information Deleting or copying hard copy files changing hard copy file names 13 2 4 Program data control Advanced Recipe information Converting advanced recipe files in G1P format CSV or TXT format Converting CSV or TXT format Advanced recipe files in G1P format Deleting copying or moving advanced recipe files creating a new advanced recipe file Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders changing advanced
50. reete te i eene dau tente e Pe ie AAE A a dnte enden e A exe dates 10 1 10 1 1 Communication setting 10 1 10 1 2 Display operation of Communication Setting sssenn 10 1 10 1 3 Communication setting contents enne 10 2 10 1 4 Communication setting operation ssssseenee nennen ener 10 4 10 2 Communication Detail Setting eee I AAEE nnns 10 8 10 2 1 Communication detail setting functions ssssssseee eem 10 8 10 2 2 Display operation of Communication Detail setting see 10 8 10 2 3 Display contents of Communication Detail setting seeeee 10 10 10 9 Ethierriet Setlirig oe UR etd e ctt dto e ot 10 15 10 3 1 Ethemet setting functions ectetuer eR BE tede 10 15 10 3 2 Display operation of Ethernet setting eene 10 15 10 3 3 Display contents of Ethernet setting ssssseee emen 10 16 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP TET Display Seting i oit ge DLE HER ea t M qai HE dt ig OH e Hue 11 1 TEEI Functional Display s cre tet e Re tete 11 1 11 1 2 Display operation of Display sssssssssesssee enne nennen nennen 11 2 11 13 Display operatiOns i nemi pete eie Tone
51. 1 1 4 and touching the Enter key display the dialog box shown on the left The password is fixed to 1111 Confirm the contents of the dialog box and touch OK button when execute the format of SD card or USB memory To cancel the memory card format touch Cancel button When touching the OK button in 4 the dialog box shown left appears for recheck Reconfirm whether to format the SD card or USB memory Touching the OK button starts the format Touching the Cancel button cancels the format of SD card or USB memory When the formatting is completed the completion dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button closes the dialog box When use an unformatted SD card or USB memory in GOT format the SD card or USB memory by PC GOT cannot format the unformatted SD card or USB memory The formatting of GOT does not change the file system Example FAT16 of the SD card or USB memory and inherits the file system before formatting 13 64 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 8 Memory information ll Memory information functions Displays the flash memory empty area size available for the user of each drive and Boot drive empty area size Confirming memory empty space is enabled without connecting a PC ll Display operation of Memory information Main menu Program Data control gt 93 Utility Display
52. 13 2 Various Data Control COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 2 Installation operation BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive built in SD card or E drive USB drive can be installed in GOT This item explains using the A drive 1 Install the SD card to which the BootOS or OS to install is written to the GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following gt 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 2 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive OS information Select drive A Built in SD C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Touching Install button starts the install 05 information xi A Kind Name Size Date Time DIR 6 1515 06 16 11 16 00 15520 3862528 OFile 4 When the installation is completed the dialog shown Install is completed left is displayed Restart now Touching OK button restarts GOT 13 8 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Upload operation BootOS and OS in the C drive Flash Memory can be uploaded to the A drive Built in SD card and E drive USB drive The SD card after uploading can be used for installing the OS on another GOT gt 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS This item explains using the A drive 1 Install
53. 13 54 13 55 Z E 6 E G1L CSV conversion G1L file of loggingfile is converted to CSV file 13 56 SE 2 G1L TXT conversion GIL file of loggingfile is converted to Unicode text file 13 56 8 909 RA Del File or folder is deleted 13 57 Copy File is copied 13 58 o Move File is moved 13 59 File name is changed 13 60 a D a 250 Create Folder New folder is created 13 61 TT SUC E Display operation of Logging information Main menu Program data control 2 9 3 Utility Display oa 248 Comunication sett ing EA E 2 GOT setup E 5 E Tine setting amp display 2 Pragram dataggont rol e E Touch Program data control lt amp a z Ed ns 9 me E oS Q e 5 a 2 Ed gt Sor m 5o oye mua A Built_in D Internal SRAM Select a drive and operate logging data files GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 53 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of Logging information Logging Information Logging Information Storage file folder display screen _ogging Information 0600001 0001 3 ogging Information Select Drive A Built in SD card D Internal SRAM BIL Tx Del Rename
54. 14 2 Self Check 14 2 4 Touch panel check BI Touch panel check function Touch panel check function checks whether there are no dead zone area in 2 dots x 2 dots E Display operation of Touch panel check Main menu Debug amp self check lt S gt 9 Utility Display GOT setup Time setting amp display L Program data control ER Debug amp Self check Touch Debug amp self check 1 When you want to abort Notes on Touch panel check Self check Menory check Display check ch panel check Touch Touch panel check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure In that case contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 14 12 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check E Touch panel check operations Touching Touch panel check of self check displays a black filled screen over the entire screen area 1 Toucha part of the screen The touched part becomes a yellow filled display UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING Black filled screen OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 2 Touching the upper left part returns to the self check Upper left touch position TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Checking the upper left part
55. 2012 JY997D44801 F Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 58L Operator information management is added Feb 2013 JY997D44801 G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 67V SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is changed VNC server function is added Jun 2013 JY997D44801 H SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is changed The restrictions of UL cUL Standards is added Sep 2014 JY997D44801 J Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 118Y GT1450 QMBD GT1450 QMBDE are added Apr 2015 JY997D44801 K A part of the cover design is changed This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION REVISIONS 1 REVISIONS 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discret
56. 24 dot numerical HQ font OS information screen 32 dot numerical HQ font TrueType numerical font 12 dot standard font 16 dot standard font Extended function OS Option OS Communication driver Storage destination Drive name folder name A drive C drive E drive G1BOOTV2 A drive C drive E drive AG1SYSU Project data User created screen data Comment data Project information 12 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic screen 16 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic TrueType Mincho Gothic A drive C drive E drive APROJECT1V 4 Resource data 13 4 Advanced alarm log file CSV file Advanced alarm log file TXT file Advanced alarm log file binary file Alarm information screen Alarm log file CSV file Hard copy file BMP file Hard copy information Hard copy file JPG file Screen Advanced recipe file CSV file 5 Advanced recipe file TXT Advanced recipe information screen Advanced recipe file binary file Logging file CSV file Logging file TXT file 9 Logging information screen Logging file binary A drive D drive E drive Pat With GT Designer3 any folder name or file name can be specified ly from the E drive It can be used only for data storage 1 The user created screen data comment data and font data are displayed as project data
57. C GIG ON mL 15 1 17 3 Cleaning of display 15 1 Communication Detail Setting 10 8 Communication Setting 10 1 Connector Conversion Adapter 8 11 Core OS ai crei te ECT aes bete E eus 16 11 D Daily amp 17 2 Data type and storage location 13 1 DGDUG tee 14 1 Display 11 1 Drawing check essen 14 6 E Error Message 18 11 18 13 Ethernet Setting 10 15 Ethernet status 14 17 External App 1 F FILE DISPLAY AND 13 1 Font CHECK nns 14 10 FX list 14 1 G GOT data package acquisition 13 73 GOT internal battery voltage status 12 3 GOT Restoration 18 1 GOT Start rper inne ees 14 21 H Hard copy information 13 27 VO check oat citi 14 14 INSTALLATION iicet tare teda nnno nad n nes 6 1
58. Communication error Proceed to 2 c The hardware such as a communication interface O No error has no error Proceed to 3 Status of the PLC CPU c Objects not displayed on the monitor screen Details Found Example The numerical display object is not Not found displayed Proceed to 3 Status of the PLC CPU 3 Status of the PLC CPU Phenomenon Cause status a PLC failure Action An error such as CONTROL BUS ERROR or SP UNIT LAY ERROR may have occurred Error code system alarm Example 1204 CPU H W fault Occurs always Proceed to the following gt 18 1 The PLC CPU may be influenced by noise or the hardware may be faulty Occurrence frequency Example Once a month O Occurs sometimes Error code system alarm Example 1204 CPU H W fault Operates normally Proceed to 4 GOT restoration procedure 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 3 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION APPENDICES 4 GOT restoration procedure Follow the procedures below starting from a and in order to check if the GOT is restored If the GOT is not restored proceed to the next item Check item Cause a Press the GOT reset switch Restored Not restored Proceed to b b Power the GOT ON OFF Restored Not restored Proceed to c
59. DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e The display section is an analog resistive type touch panel If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction e When programs or parameters of the controller such as a PLC that is monitored by the GOT are changed be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction NCAUTION e Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the GOTs and the controllers in the network When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the controllers except the GOT in the network
60. Dedicated for GT11 10 Dedicated for GT10 09 05 Common for GT16 GT15 GT14 GT11 GT10 01 Product yeaa Model name Specifications name GT1455 QTBDE 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT olor liquid crystal display 69936 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB built in battery built in Ethernet interface GT1455 QTBD 5 7 320 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal display 65536 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB built in battery 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT monochrome liquid crystal display monochrome black white GT1450 QMBDE Q DC24V memory size 9MB built in battery built in Ethernet interface GOT GT1450 QMBD 5 7 320 x 240 oe TFT monochrome liquid crystal display monochrome black white DC24V memory size 9MB built in battery GT1450 QLBDE 5 7 320 x 240 dol STN monochrome liquid crystal display monochrome black white 24VDC memory size 9MB built in battery built in Ethernet interface GT1450 QLBD 5 7 320 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal display monochrome black white 24VDC memory size 9MB built in battery 2 2 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 System Equipment 2 2 2 Option Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs Sold separately Cable Product name Model name Contents 5 length ul GT01 C10R4 8P 1m 5 GT01 C30R4 8P 3m FXCPU direct ti Pes MEE Tom For connecting GOT to FXCPU MINI DIN 8pin pa For connecting GOT to FXC
61. Folders and files displayed Displays the total number of the displayed files For the folders and files displayed refer to the following s 13 1 4 Display file 13 6 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control ll OS information operation 1 Display operation of OS information 05 information 615 9 Size Date Time 1346K 08 26 09 00 47 500K 08 26 09 00 48 FON 406K 08 26 09 00 48 61D 3K 08 26 09 00 48 61 871K 08 26 09 00 43 FON 16K 08 26 09 00 49 117K 08 26 09 00 49 220K 08 01 08 17 08 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touching a drive in Select drive displays the information of the first folder of the touched drive Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder Touching a folder name of displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy Touching button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching A button scrolls up down the screen by one screen Touching a file name selects and inverts the file For operation of installation upload property data check refer to the following Install s This section 2 Upload gt This section 3 Property 57 This section 4 Data check gt This section 5 Touching x button closes the screen 99 1 N
62. Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for the registration the Customer Keyword entry screen of 3 is displayed For the keyword 8 digits from to 9 or A to F must be set Keyword Please input keyword Registration conclition 2nd All Protect Setting Target PLC When keyword and 2nd keyword cane oe When only keyword is registered registered FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Registration conclition can be selected i Registration conclition 2 cannot be selected FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword 1 d 1 For details on FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword refer to the manual of the PLC used 2 Registration conclition Options can be selected among Read Write Protect Write Protect or All Protect For access restrictions of each setting refer to the manual of the PLC used 3 When Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for registration and the keyword input is completed the Customer Keyword registration screen is the displayed When the customer keyword is input and the Enter key is touched registration is completed To set the customer keyword 8 digits from 0 to 9 or A to F must be used Please input Customer keyword 10 12 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 1 2 3 Selection of keyword protect
63. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO Tiooog GT14 User s Manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION j Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions WARN IN G resulting in death or severe injury j Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the AN caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety m Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Some failures of the GOT communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing s
64. Operating hours does not match with the difference between Current Time and Start Time Dperating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at Operating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change 14 22 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 4 GOT start time 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION 2 CLEAN Lr o z rm gt e In utility the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent POINT ob Precautions for cleaning Sud Sa Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they may cause the protective dE sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off Sz9 In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices e 2 ic a po Z253 E Display operation of Clean F 5 459 gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu E 248 855 2 A E Touch Clean 25 BES RE T88 Even if touch points other than the upper left corner and upper right corner of the screen the GOT does not operates xu E Operation of Clean 59 After cleaning the screen touch the screen follow
65. Setting 5V power supply Yes on the utility screen of GT14 5V power supply is a function that supplies electrical power to the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor It cannot be used in other controllers For details on the 5V power supply refer to the following gt 10 1 3 Communication setting contents 2 5V power supply can be set with the GT 14 hardware version B or later In the hardware version A since 5V power is always supplied this setting operation is invalid 3 To use the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor select CoreOS of version V05 28 00AP or later and the standard OS of version V05 28 00 or later for GT14 For details on the version confirmation refer to the following gt 13 1 2 OS version confirmation 8 16 8 OPTION 8 11 RS 232 485 Signal Conversion Adapter 9 UTILITY FUNCTION Utility is a function which carries out connection of GOT and PLC screen display and operation method settings program data control and self check etc For the utility function list refer to the following 9 2 Utility Function List 9 1 Utility Execution For utility execution utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and Standard monitor OS in the C drive Flash memory There are following three types for the installing Standard monitor OS methods 1 GT Designer3 gt GOT USB interface or Ethernet interface or RS 232 interface 1 Installed directly from GT Designer3
66. Unicode text file GIL TXT button Create Folder 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive ARPOOO CSV _0600001_0000 3344KB 3861584KB Please select destination Execute Cancel 4 Touching Execute button displays the dialog box File conversion from GIL to CSV shown left Source file L06000001 0002 G1L Touch OK button dede 9 While executing Processing message appears on the screen Example Dialog box if the G61L CSV button is touched 5 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown at left File conversion from GIL to CSV Source file L0G00001_0001 61L appears without starting the conversion Change to LOG00001 0001 CSV Touching OK button overwrites the file Do you want to Overwrite the file Touching Cancel button cancels the conversion 6 The message of completion is displayed in dialog Process completed box when conversion is completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 56 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Deletion operation Folder and file to be used on logging are deleted s Information Target file LOGOO001_0001 G1L Are you sure do you want to delete Process completed Cannot delete Source file exist in folder 1 Touch and select the file folder to delete Touching Del button displ
67. or more J e Use the product after checking that the functions and performances operate correctly 8 OPTION 8 15 8 10 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension Z E a 9 8 11 RS 232 485 Signal Conversion Adapter GT14 RS2T4 9P type RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor enables conversion of RS 232 communication interface to RS 485 communication interface For the wiring between the RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter and the controller refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 8 11 1 Applicable RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter The following RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor is applicable Model name Contents For GOT multi drop connection multi channel function connection GT14 RS2T4 9P temperature controller connection and MODBUS R RTU connection 8 11 2 Installing procedure of RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter 1 Turn the GOT power off 2 Connect the RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter to the RS 232 interface on the GOT 3 Fix the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor to the GOT using the provided M3 tapping screws Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 5V power supply 1 To use the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor select Communication Setting Communication
68. respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at our discretion In some of three cases however Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Server Windows Vista and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registere
69. 14 3 Ethernet status check Sends a ping to check the Ethernet connection status 14 17 Shs 8z9 14 2 1 Memory check g a 7 a ll Memory check function Memory check function carries out the write read check of A drive Built in SD drive Flash Memory D drive Internal SRAM drive USB memory ao 8 Function Description A drive memory check Checks whether the memory Built in SD card of the A drive can be read written normally E C drive memory check Checks whether the memory Flash Memory of the C drive can be read written normally a g EA D drive memory check Checks whether the memory Internal SRAM of the D drive can be read written normally 5 Q 2 drive memory check Checks whether the memory USB memory of the E drive can be read written normally E 2 E Display operation of Memory check sae lt Main Menu Debug amp self check Self check lt lt S gt 9 3 Utility Display 2 z EO ER aga GOT setup 9 TO Time setting amp display E Progran data control E 2 Debug amp self check Memory check self check 4 Touch Debug amp self check E D Z Memory check 9 lt mo Memory check mE Belect Drive So Built in lt C Flash Memory PR E D Internal SRAM dc o2 zz 20 lt 5 ow On Select the memory to check and touch Check COREOS BOOTOS AND S
70. 16 11 GIOSMONT OUT Standard monitor 05 Basic 05 27 60 1355K G1F 168L6 F N 06 16 11 11 17 16dot Gothic Japanese Europe Basic 05 27 00 500K G1F125LG FON 06 16 11 11 17 12dot Font Japanese Europe Basic 05 27 00 407K GIOSMONT 61D 06 16 11 11 17 System Screen Information Basic 05 27 61 For details of the screen display operation refer to the following 53 13 2 1 OS information Version confirmation of BootOS by rating plate Explanation of OS version 01 00 00 A BootOS version Appears only when the property of the BootOS is displayed Minor version Major version Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face 4 wrsusish ELECTRIC GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL only the lower digit is printed GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBDE IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 15 6W IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 15 6W Example H W version H S N 1160003 A a S N 1160003 D EN Boot OS version AD MAC ADD 12 34 56 78 90 12 AA MAC ADD 12 34 56 78 90 12 HD ENDE 7 BootOS V BootOS Rating plate HD MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION H MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN Version MADE IN JAPAN Version 80M1 IND CONT EQ 80M1 IND CONT EQ t US LISTED t US LISTED 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 3 13 1 Data Storage Locatio
71. 16 scales are used to improve the display High speed monitoring through high speed communication at maximum of 115 2kbps High speed display and high speed touch switch response The operation performance is improved by the analog touch panel More efficient GOT operations including screen design startup adjustment management and maintenance works The 9MB built in flash memory is included as standard SD card interface is included as standard RS 232 interface is included as standard RS 422 485 interface is included as standard USB interface host device is included as standard Ethernet interface is included as standard System font types are increased by the adoption of the font installation system Four types of alarms system alarm user alarm alarm history and alarm popup display are integrated and realizing an efficient alarm notification Enhanced support of FA device setup tools Transferring or monitoring the sequence programs using the PC connected to GOT is available during connection to A QnA L Q or FX series PLC CPU FA Transparent function 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features 1 1 1 Rough procedure The outline procedures before operating GOT and the descriptions of each item are shown below Install GT Designers in the PC Create project data Wire for the GOT power supply and the controller Wire for the controller power supply and 1 0 Turn on the
72. 20ms 10ms 006 10ms 20ms 40ms 80ms Standard Key reaction speed 120ms Operation setting by GT Designer3 Select Common Settings GOT Environment Settings Setup from GT Designer3 to make the settings of buzzer sound and buzzer sound at window move To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT 5 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 6 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 2 Display operation of Operation Main menu GOT setup 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu BH cohavior aw Touch GOT setup Operation Operation peration Buzzer volume SHORT n Window move buzzer E N Secur ity setting Sett ing r 22 Utility call key Setting change settings an Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 FE 10 07 Key reaction speed Standard 0 m Touch panel calibration USB mouse keyboar d 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 7 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 3 Setting operation of operation E Buzzer volume window move buzzer volume Operation X 1 Touching the setting item changes the setting items Buzzer volume SHORT Window move buzzer ON Security setting Setting 1 Utility call key Setting
73. 8 OPTION 8 1 8 1 SD Card OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION ee WIRING ll Removing 1 Set the SD card access switch of the GOT to OFF od Make sure that the SD card access LED turns off 0 When the SD card access LED turns off SD card be installed or removed even during the GOT power on 2 Push in the SD card once and leave your finger then remove the SD card Precautions for removing the SD card 1 While the SD card access LED is on do not install remove the SD card or power off the GOT To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction 2 When ejecting the SD card support it by hand since it may pop out Failure to do so may cause a fall of the SD card leading to failure or damage of the card 8 OPTION 8 1 SD Card 8 2 USB Memory The USB memory is used to transmit the OS or project data and to save the data of the alarm history function For details refer to the following 2 amp lt 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL gt 8 2 1 Applicable USB memory 6 The following USB memory is applicable for GOT 5 Description 2 8 Commercially available USB memory gt 1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of val
74. 802 istis Refer to explanations of SB0049 on the applicable network manual O u 803 Transient error Refer to explanations of SBOOEE on the applicable network manual O Check if the switch settings have no error 850 CC Link switch setting error Check error codes stored in SWO006A O Refer to explanations of SBOO6A on the applicable network manual Check if terminating resistors are connected Check error codes for the PLC CPU Abnormal cyclic transmission 851 st tus Check the parameter for the PLC CPU on the master station O Check the error status of the master station Refer to explanations of SBOO6E on the applicable network manual Check if the cable is unplugged or not 852 Abnormal host line status j Refer to explanations of SB0090 on the applicable network manual Check the transient error occurrence status for each station stored in 853 Transient error SW0094 to SW0097 O Refer to explanations of SB0094 1 When an error occurs is stored to the channel No 18 20 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions E External dimensions of GT14 164 6 46 J 22 120 4 73 _ 3 0 91 os gls E y F N A m 4 40UNC Inch screw type M2 6 Metric screw type 135 5 32 120 4 73
75. At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy 6 When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 16 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 3 Project Information 2 E Function of project information The project data files stored in each drive A Built in SD Flash Memory USB memory be displayed 2 A by lists In addition the files be downloaded uploaded deleted or copied etc Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder type name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 18 13 19 D Delete Deletes project data 13 19 5 e Copy Copies project data can copy the A drive and E drive 13 20 m ODE Property display Displays the project data creation date author name and the version of GT Designer3 13 21 em Data check Data check of files is possible 13 22 8 3 Download Downloads the project data written in the A drive Built in SD card E drive USB drive to C drive 13 22 Flash Memory Setup T
76. Font check Motel n amount pa Notes on Font Check Judged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE Alphabetic characters etc 0x0000 to 0x04F9 From basic Latin to Kirill Hangul characters OxXACOO to OxD7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary Kanji Ox4E00 to Ox9FA5 CJK integrated Kanjis If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be installed Install the standard monitor OS again 14 10 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check Font check operation Font check starts by touching Font Check in the Display check screen The character data of the built in font in the built in flash memory can be checked visually to confirm the font drawings by displaying the character data serially on the screen 1 Before execute font check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen Upper left touch Upper right touch position position The installed font data is displayed by touching the upper right part of the screen R Font data LIE FC 1 2 a 2 Ed 6 gt m Option fonts To display optional fonts the option font installation is required The option fonts are displayed at the end 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 11
77. G1P Do you want to copy the file Target file ARPOO01 G1P Do you want to overwrite the file Process completed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 1 Touch and select the file to 2 Touch the Copy button 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders 4 Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 Ifthere is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the copy 6 When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 2 Various Data Control 13 41 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 6 Move operation Files to be used in advanced recipe are moved 1 Touch and select the file to move 2 Touch the Move button 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive Please select destination Execute Cancel 4 Touching Execute button displays the dialog box Target file ARPOOO1 GIP shown left Do you w
78. German At factory shipment User s selection 0 to 60 seconds GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF Opening screen time The title display period at the main unit boot can be set ge At factory shipment 5 seconds 9o The period from the user stops the touch panel operation till 0 to 60 minutes 5 Screen save time the screen save function starts can be set At factory shipment 5 seconds Whether turning ON OFF the backlight simultaneously at ON OFF Screen save backlight iG the start of the screen save function can be specified At factory shipment OFF Be ox Es Battery alarm display Whether to display system alarm when the voltage ofthe GOT ON OFF E m internal battery has dropped can be specified At factory shipment OFF ao The brightness can be adjusted g Brightness contrast 20 3 W Brightness contrast H 5 estu Invert colors For the user created screen and the utility screen whether to ON OFF On only GT1450 Q invert the displayed colors can be specified At factory shipment OFF 1 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual 57 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Setting 0 does not hide the title screen The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer which changes depending on the project data co
79. IP67f Tightening torque of nut is 0 294 to 0 343N m Overtightening or undertightening may disable the waterproof effect Tighten the waterproof cap properly when the cable is not used 8 14 8 OPTION 8 10 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension E Precautions on installing the panel mounted USB port extension 1 2 3 4 5 6 Run power lines servo amplifier drive wires and panel mounted USB port extensions so that they do not cross each other Install the panel mounted USB port extension away from noise sources such as equipment Do not twist bend at a sharp angle or a right angle and stretch the panel mounted USB port extension since the cable may be broken Install it while considering the following control panel inside dimensions Dimension between the back of the GOT and structures 1 80 3 15 Jee m Dimension of the protruding cable Insert the USB plug part of the tip of the panel mounted USB port extension securely to the USB port of the GOT Since the USB plug part may be inserted loosely or unplugged by power of vibrations impacts or pulling fix the cable to the structures inside the panel or the preventive hole from removing for the USB cable of the GOT main unit by using the banding band or others 80 3 15
80. Menu Communication setting Iri GOT setup Time setting amp display 8 Program data control A Debug amp self check Language 2 Language 1 Main menu The menu items that can be selected from the GOT utility are displayed Touching a menu item in the main menu displays the setting screen or following selection screen for the item 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility screen and system alarms Touching the Language button displays the Select Language screen Select Language gt English ot 0 Deutsch 1 Touch the button of a desired language and then OK button and the language is selected 2 Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the language of the utility is switched to the selected 9 4 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 3 Utility Display When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected language and the installed fonts are not matched The following screen is displayed Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is switched to the selected one 22 9 u gt E COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 1 Selectable languages The system message switch button is displayed only for the selectable languages The selectable languages
81. Missing bits is occurred in the following cases There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn according to the layout and procedures described in gt 14 2 2 Display operation of drawing check When missing bits occurs contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 14 6 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check E Drawing check operation z o The screen for drawing check can be displayed by touching Drawing check on the Display check menu E 1 Before execute drawing check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the E next check in each step during drawing check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen For GT1455 Q 65536 colors the screen is displayed in E color blue black red purple green light blue yellow and Upper left touch Upper right touch E On white position position E Z Also for GT1450 Q monochrome 16 scales the screen EOS color is reduced to monochrome 16 scales and displayed FE This section explains in the case of GT1455 Q 65536 SES colors e 2 Missing bit Color Check ees By touching the upper right part of the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order blue gt black purple green light blue yellow white
82. RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor is used amp E 10 1 2 Display operation of Communication Setting lt z a NUT as Main menu Communication setting 55 gt lt gt 9 3 Utility Display S94 200 0 Main Menu Communication Se T88 Communication setting GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK Communication setting Communication Setting Standard I F Setting ChNo RS422 485 1 MELSEC FX ChMo RS232 5V supply 2 Multidrop slave ChNo USB 9 Host PC ChNo Ethernet None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External device 9 PC connection CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN ee if 0 assign OK INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 10 1 Communication setting 10 1 3 Communication setting contents This section describes setting items and display contents for Communication Setting Communication Setting x Standard I F Setting ChNo RS422 485 2 3 gt 1 MELSEC FX 4 ChNo RS232 2 SV supply 6 3 gt 2 Mul tidrop slave 4 ChNo USB 2 3 98 Host PC 4 ChNo Ethernet lt 2 None 4 Definition of ChNo D None 1 2 FA device B External device 9 PC connection mm Ur CH Driver assign OK 5 1 1 Ch
83. Restart now 13 24 13 2 Various Data Control 7 Mount the SD card to GOT For the SD card installation removal method refer to the following 57 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 2 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 3 Touching Download button displays the screen shown on the left Touching OK button executes the setup 4 When the setup is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching OK button restarts the GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 7 Upload setup cancel operation a Upload operation By upload operation the project data is transferred from the C drive Flash Memory to the A drive Build in SD card or E drive USB drive The SD card or USB memory after uploading can be used for downloading project data to another GOT This item explains using the A drive Before upload operation The project data cannot be uploaded to the A drive when the project data of the A drive is set up Execute setup cancel gt 7 b Setup cancel operation before uploading the project data 1 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive Upload Do you want to upload 2 Touching Upload button displays the screen shown on the left d Touching OK button executes the upload 4 Ifthereisa project data of the same name in the A The project dala is already existed ae the the left is displayed f upload is done the project dat
84. Scroll one line column amp Scroll window 9 8 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Change of setting value Operation Detail setting MELSEC FX Setting item Select button Setting item Select button 1 Setting item select button Touch the select button to change the settings The setting methods differ depending on the setting items The following types of setting method are available Q a b c Switch the setting value Touch the button to switch the setting value as shown in ON OFF Enter the setting value with a keyboard It is a key for inputting the numerical value Touching this button displays a keyboard on the GOT screen For the operation of keyboard refer to the next page Move to another setting screen Touching this button moves to another setting screen For the setting method of each setting item refer to the setting operation of each setting screen OK button Cancel button x Close Return button Reflect or cancel the changed settings a b c OK button Touching this button reflects the changed settings Cancel button Touching this button cancels the changed settings and return to the previous screen x Close Return button Touching this button closes the screen Depending on the setting item the GOT restarts If x button is
85. Touching x button without touching OK button displays the dialogue box shown on the left OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed Closing the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents E Screen save backlight battery alarm display invert colors xi 1 Touching the setting item changes the setting items Language Japanese ON T OFF Opening sereen tine lt L39 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON 1 Brightness contrast Setting Touching x button without touching OK button With do not push OK button displays the dialogue box shown on the left if you close the screen the changed OK button The changed value is canceled and value will be canceled the screen is closed Mid Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed el Closing the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents 11 4 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 1 Display Setting E Brightness contrast x 7 Touching the setting items displays the brightness Language c
86. X Wire and connect GOT1000 series equipments as instructed below If the GOT1000 series equipments are configured in a way different from the following instructions the system may not comply with EMC directives E Power and ground wires wiring method 2 uj m Bo x GA 1 Power and ground wires wiring method Connect the power wire and connection cable as shown in the illustration and be sure to attach a ferrite core TDK Corporation type ZCAT3035 1330 or similar within the range shown below Lead the power wire and ground wire as shown in 5 2 1 Control panel 2 Be sure to ground the FG cable and protective ground cable z LE A INPUT E FG 24V DC a TH amp n 2 Up to 75mm o 2 2 LT n 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 5 5 2 EMC Directive ZINAR Any device which utilizes a data communication function is susceptible to the wider effects of local EMC noise Therefore when installing any communication cables care should always be taken with the routing and location of those cables Optional ferrite cores are recommended when the cable route is close to EMC noise sources like welders large motors etc All tests have been performed with original Mitsubishi cables For customer prepared cables please refer to the previous page GOT Unit Existing Cables User Made Cables GT1450 QLBD GT1450 QLBDE party cables
87. a network connection When selecting Do not maintain a network connection the GOT is disconnected from the network at the addition of a device with the same IP address as the GOT Therefore there is a possibility that the running GOT cannot be communicated by IP address setting mistakes or intended actions by malicious users and the system control may be influenced by those errors Please change the setting of Behavior of duplicate IPs after carefully examining the necessity 2 Precautions for using a switching hub compatible with the spanning tree protocol For the switching hub port connected with the GOT configure the setting PortFast or others that makes the GOT be ready for communications forwarding state The setting is required to make sure that the delay right after the connection by the spanning tree protocol does not occur Without the setting the Ethernet IP address duplication is not correctly detected Additionally the GOT may not be connected to Ethernet correctly For the setting that makes the GOT be ready for communications forwarding state refer to the user s manual for the switching hub used 11 24 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs 11 6 License Management 2 o For using functions which require a license register the license for the GOT For releasing registered license for the GOT also execute the license management screen lt Licen
88. administrator password peratorName Administrator OPO001 OPOO0 2 OPOO03 OPOOQ5 ID Level Update z 1001 10 2012 0 1 2080 1002 12 2012 07 22 1003 12 2012 07 22 1005 15 2012 01 22 gy Add Edit Delete Undo Drive in use Import Export Save 1 Touch the Undo button The dialog box shown left is displayed and then touch the OK button The Admin password authentication screen is displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the current operator information is restored to the previous saved one 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control Import operation Import the operator information that is already exported to a SD card to the GOT 1 Touch the Import button Operator information management OperatorName ID Level U Administrator 1 1001 10 OPO002 1002 12 0 1003 12 5 1005 15 1 2 The dialog box shown left is displayed The import process overwr ites Touch button and then the Admin password Do proceed authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be inp
89. an error message is displayed Security level change success 4 Touching OK button returns the screen to the password input screen again Password error 5 Touching x button returns the screen to the security setting screen About forgetting to return to the original level after changing security level temporarily When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level do not forget to return the security level to the original level 11 10 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting 2 E Utility call key setting function The key position for calling the main menu of the utility be specified 2 For key position O or 1 point can be specified from 4 corners on the screen E By keeping pressing the screen a setting to switch the screen to the utility is available 5 This prevents a switching to the utility by an unintentional operation 2 POINT E Qo SES Operation setting by GT Designer3 gt Select Common Settings GOT Environment Settings GOT Setup from GT Designer3 to make the settings 55 5 of the utility call key 888 To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Display operation of Utility call key 2 9
90. applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V 3 This index indicates the degree to which conductive pollution is generated in the environment where the equipment is used ra In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation d D 2 o 2 2 Lr a 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 3 1 General Specifications 3 2 Performance Specifications The performance specifications are as follows Display section Specifications GT1455 QTBD E GT1450 QMBD E GT1450 QLBD E TET color liquid crystal white black ee white black Screen size 5 7 Resolution 320 x 240 dots Display size W115 4 53 x H86 3 39 mm inch Horizontal format Display character 16 dot standard font 20 characters 15 lines 12 dot standard font 26 characters 20 lines Display color 65536 colors Monochrome white black 16 scales 1 Display angle 2 Left Right 45 degrees Top 20 degrees Bottom 40 degrees Horizontal format Left Right 80 degrees Top 80 degrees Bottom 60 degrees Horizontal format Intensity of liquid crystal display only 400 cd m 300 cd m Contrast adjustment 32 level adjustment Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Life A
91. been 522 Unnecessary file deleted to created x create new file Note that the old file is deleted and the new file is created if the file of the same name with different contents exists when creating files 524 Device writing error Error occurred while writing in the device Correct device Correct the device 525 Unable to read write alarm log Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different project files under different projects Confirm where to store the alarm log file and alarm log file The file specified for the file conversion does not exist 526 File conversion failed EN x Check the settings for specifying a file to be converted The error may be caused by a failure in the GOT main unit Please Error in SRAM Failed to write A 528 data consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or x representative 529 Data error in SRAM Error in SRAM data due to battery voltage low etc Check the battery life Confirm the battery status The channel of the specified monitor target does not exist or the channel Improper monitor device 530 is not the monitor target x Confirm monitor channel Confirm the monitor target channel of the screen data 535 Cannot open image file Confirm whether any file exists in the SD card or USB memory x 75 Confirm whether image files the SD card or USB memory Image file error or invalid file 536 normal x format
92. between a personal computer and a controller via the GOT FA transparent function GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products Obtaining information of Non Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi GOT Products 1 for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Connecting Non Mitsubishi products to the GOT Products 2 for GT Works3 Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer E MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT E Transferring data to the GOT Writing data to the GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Reading data from the GOT Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Verifying a editing project to a GOT project E Others m GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Configuring the extended function and option function Functions for GT Works3 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS E GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT1695 GT1695M X Abbreviation of GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD GT1685 GT1685M S Abbreviation of GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD GT1675M S
93. by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
94. by one character when Del Key is touched while inputting year month day time minutes seconds Del Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above gt gt 5 Close the keyboard after the input time is displayed clock display a E e The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed Enter 832 The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of 9 3 E 5 a gt Cn Cancel the input time and returns the time of clock display to the time at which the keyboard was displayed and close the 5 E gt keyboard Ome Cancel The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of a E a ae 4 3 Touching the OK button reflects the settings and EO aga restarts updating the clock display 00 a Then the settings are reflected to both clock data uj 52 Loo on the GOT and controller Touching x button restarts the GOT if the clock settings is changed or closes the screen if clock settings is not changed GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 3 GOT internal battery voltage status Displays battery voltage status Display Status a Qu Low None Low voltage 5 When the battery voltage is low replace the battery immediately o For battery replacement procedure refer to the following d D n 5
95. cable Communication Leading the power line and communication cable outside the panel at separate places can make the communication cable less influenced by noise from the power line Installing the communication cable apart from the power line or using a separator made of metal in the duct as shown in Fig B can make the communication cable less influenced by noise O Effective O Ineffective 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 5 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION APPENDICES 3 Wiring of GOT s FG cable and power line O Installed together Not installed together The FG cable and power line of the GOT are installed together Current status Power for the power equipment Measure for the Separating the FG cable and power line of Effective cables installed the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of Ineffective together FG noise Power for the power equipment 4 Surge measures A surge suppressor is used for the wiring of the load such as MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor PLC Used When a surge suppressor is used fill out O Not used the entry area below with the surge suppressor model name and the name of the equipment for which the surge suppressor is used Current status PLC M for th Attaching the surge suppressor
96. cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard tvpe Use USB mouse Inter lock with cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type mouse Japanese 106 mM 5 To move the mouse cursor to the touched position touch the setting item of Interlock with mouse cursor touch operation The setting content is changed by touching YES T NO To use the USB keyboard touch the setting item of Use USB keyboard The setting content is changed by touching YES NO To use the USB keyboard touch the setting item of USB keyboard type The setting content is changed by touching Japanese 106 keyboard lt gt English 101 keyboard Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button returns the screen to the Operation screen 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 8 VNC R server function setting E VNC server function setting In the VNC server function setting the authorization guarantee time for the VNC server function can be set For the details of the VNC server function refer to the following K GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions The time that the authorized equipment holds the authorization after you operate the authorized 0 to 3600 seconds At factory shipment 0 seconds Operating priority guaranteed time equipment can be
97. differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For the relation between the selectable languages and the fonts refer to the following CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 2 5 Specifications of Applicable Characters 2 System language switching using the device The system language can be switched using the system language switching device set with GT Designer3 For the setting method of the system language switching device refer to the following FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 4 3 Language Switching Device Setting GOT Environmental Setting Language Switching GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 5 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu The following four types of operation can display the main menu Display the main menu after installing the Standard monitor OS from GT Designers to the built in flash memory of the GOT 1 When project data is undownloaded After the GOT is turned on a dialog box for notifying of absence of project data is displayed After the dialog box is displayed touch the OK button to display the main menu GOT power on Communication setting
98. edited is displayed or input an operator security level to be added 0 to 15 d Password Input a password Up to 16 alphanumeric characters Make a permanent password Switches the setting of the item disabled and enabled Disabled V Enabled Use ext auth ID Switches whether to use the external authentication ID Not Used V Used Ext auth ID The external authentication ID is displayed or input an external authentication ID External authentication ID setting range alphanumerics 4 to 32 digits 5 Function setting 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 4 Operator management operation Operator setting menu Operator management MT Password change Is Function setting Admin pa rd authentication Hale OperatorName Level U Administrator OPO001 1001 10 OPO002 1002 12 OPOOQS 1003 12 If you close the screen before pressing OK button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 1 Touch Operator management in the operator setting menu The Admin password authentication screen is displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small lett
99. external device of PLC CY Activated the output upon backlight NET o shutoff detection indicates the output number at which the external device is connected Precautions for the backlight shutoff status In the backlight shutoff status the touch key operates Early replacement of backlight is recommended 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 7 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection 17 8 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection 18 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the GOT restoration sheet and the error message system alarm list 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This section provides restoration methods for the case the GOT does not operate normally which are listed in check sheets The following explains how to use each sheet 1 When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions GOT status check sheet When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions identify the cause of the malfunction etc with GOT status check sheet and take corrective action When the GOT is restored see the status for a while 2 When the wiring status needs to be improved GOT installation status check sheet When the noise caused by the GOT wiring status is considered to have caused the malfunction etc based on the check result of 1 above take corrective action for wiring using GOT installation status check sheet When the GOT is restored see the sta
100. hae dote een 11 3 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding emn 11 6 11 2 1 Operation setting functions ssssssessenneenne emere nennen 11 6 11 2 2 Display operation of Operation 11 7 11 2 3 Setting operation of operation aisian eaea nen nnns 11 8 11 22452 Security level change Ere edt eter e tpm ede tnde 11 9 11 2 5 Utility Call ee den pep ee nega reri 11 11 11 2 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration 11 13 11 2 7 USB mouse keyboard setting nene ennemis 11 15 11 2 8 VNC R server function setting mme nnns 11 17 11 3 Transparent Mode Setting iren e Hed e eee aei eode uisa 11 18 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting A A A 11 19 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPS 11 22 11 6 License Management oer aec d goto lee ame 11 25 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1 Time Setting and DISplay eo A ete e dulce deus Ret abite 12 1 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions ssssseeenne eene 12 1 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 1 Data Storage Location ii eder
101. input and the Enter key is touched the protection is cancelled Please input keyword Target PLC Setting FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword or Customer Keyword to cancel the protection Input a keyword only into keyword to cancel the protection FX PLC not compatible with 2nd 2nd keyword is ignored keyword 4 Protect A keyword with cancelled protection is reactivated for protection 1 Touching the Protect key activates keyword protection 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 14 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10 3 Ethernet Setting 10 3 1 Ethernet setting functions The contents of the Ethernet setting in drawing software can be checked The setting of the host station can be changed For Ethernet setting refer to the following gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 10 3 2 Display operation of Ethernet setting Main menu Communication setting CF 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu S Communication Se 7 Communication setting EY Etherget setting Ethernet setting Ethernet setting 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 3 Ethernet Setting 10 15 ICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 10 3 3 Display contents of Ethernet setting The following describes the setting items and the display contents of the Ethernet setting Ethernet setting
102. is notified by dialog box If the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally the dialog box notifying of the normal termination mentioned left is displayed Touching OK button after confirming the result returns to I O check If the dialog box mentioned left is displayed after selecting connecting target confirmation or during CPU communication check confirm the following No misconnection with CPU gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 No missettings of parameter 10 2 Communication Detail Setting No hardware error 18 TROUBLESHOOTING Touching OK button after confirming the result returns to I O check Touching Self carries out the hardware check of RS 232 interface 1 GT14 Rear face Self loopback check connector 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK For preparation for the self loopback communication check insert the connector for self loopback check Customer purchased shown in the diagram left in the RS 232 interface For this connector short 2 and 3 pins 7 and 8 pins and 4 and 6 pins respectively In the communication setting of the GOT utility set the channel number for the RS 232 interface to 0 None 14 2 Self Check 14 15 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISP
103. log file is changed LINE A LOB ku 1 AJWIEJRIT Y UJT OJP LIXICIVIBININ Enter Before LOG00001_0001 G1L After LINE A_LOG G1L Change fi lename Process completed 1 Touch and select the file to change the name Touching Rename button displays the screen shown left Input the file name to be changed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Touching OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 7 Folder create operation An operation log folder is created 7 Touch the Create Folder button Information 2 The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed i i LINE B A Z English capital ER _ lt gt Enter Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Create new folder 4 Touching OK button starts creating folder COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 5 When creating folder is completed completion d
104. m Trigger backup settings 3 Max of backup data 1 Touching the setting items displays the keyboard orat ion setting z Input numerical value from the keyboard Drive for backup setting A Bui Id in SD card Drive for backup data Setting range 0 to 50 Default 10 ABui Idzin SD When 0 is specified the GOT does not check the Trig bkup setting Setting number of backup data to be stored Max of bkup data 0 10 No Nimit 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Enable CPU No setti NO Touching x button returns the screen to the GOT 7 N Setup screen 2 4 Enable CPU No setting 1 Touching the setting item changes the setting items Backup restoration setting xd Drive for backup setting A Bui Id in SD card Drive for backup data A Bui Id in SD card Trig bkup setting Setting Max of bkup data 0 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Cee 0 Touching x button returns the screen to the GOT Enable CPU No setting NO Setup screen oa 11 20 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting E Trigger backup settings z When the conditions of the trigger specified for each backup setting Rise Time are met the GOT automatically backs o up data 2 How to use the tri
105. monitored or tested 14 1 x E D obs A list editor The sequence program of ACPU can be list edited 14 1 ost FX list editor The sequence program of FXCPU can be list edited 14 1 lt Backup restoration Data can be backed up restored from the controller to GOT or backup data can be deleted 14 2 25 4 ERO EP 28102 Gad 14 1 1 System monitor FE Loo 4 System monitor allows monitoring and changing the devices in controllers For display contents and operation procedure refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 14 1 2 A list editor MELSEC A list editor allows changing the sequence programs in ACPU QCPU A mode For display contents and operation procedure refer to the following manual gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 14 1 3 FX list editor FX list editor allows changing the sequence programs in an FX PLC For display contents and operation procedure refer to the following manual 57 GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 1 14 1 Debug LIE 0 a Z Ed 5 n Ww a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 1 4 Backup restoration E Display operation of Backup restoration Main Menu Debug amp self check 57 9 3 Utility Display System
106. occurred GOT error RESET Error causes can be identified by the error code error message and channel No displayed on the System alarm screen fc 18 TROUBLESHOOTING System alarm disp ROO Karrine Bui lt in battery voltage is low 11 57 21 CPU error No Error 2 method for resetting system alarm depends on an System alarm disp x error GOT error GOT error Reset Touch Reset button to reset system alarms RO Marnirg Built in battery voltage is Tow 11 57 21 CPU error and Network error CPU error The system alarm is automatically reset after its cause is eliminated No Error 1 Before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error Eliminate the system alarm cause before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error If not eliminated the system alarm display in the GOT error will not be reset even after the reset operation 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset GOT error code Write device GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 b13 14 20 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 3 System Alarm Display 14 4 start time E GOT start time function GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time Start time of GOT Current time of GOT Operating hours of GOT E Display operation of GOT start time Main Menu Debug amp self check 237 9 3 Utility Display
107. of GT1275 VNBA GT1275 VNBD GT1265 GT1265 V Abbreviation of GT1265 VNBA GT1265 VNBD GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275 GT1265 GT1155 Q Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD GT11 Abbreviation of GT115L GT11 Handy GOT GT1055 Q Abbreviation of GT1055 QSBD GT1050 GT1050 Q Abbreviation of GT1050 QBBD GT1045 Q Abbreviation of GT1045 QSBD GT1040 GT1040 Q Abbreviation of GT1040 QBBD Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBL GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 GT1030 LBLW GT1030 LWD GT1030 LWD2 GT1030 LWL GT1030 LWDW GT1030 LWDW2 GT1030 GT1030 LWLW GT1030 HBD GT1030 HBD2 GT1030 HBL GT1030 HBDW GT1030 HBDW2 GT1030 HBLW GT1030 HWD GT1030 HWD2 GT1030 HWL GT1030 HWDW GT1030 HWDW2 GT1030 HWLW Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 GT1020 LBLW GT1020 LWD GT1020LWD2 GT1020 LWL GT1020 LWDW GT1020 LWDW2 GT1020 LWLW GT10 Abbreviation of GT1050 GT1040 GT1030 GT1020 Abbreviations and generic terms GT16 Handy GOT GT1665HS V Handy Description Abbreviation of GT1665HS VTBD GOT1000 Series GOT GT11 GT1155HS Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD Handy GOT GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT A900 series GOT F900 series
108. of advanced recipe file to be operated The more number of blocks increases the longer it takes to process advanced recipe folder file Also the process to create the first file may take time depending on the setting of advanced recipe file Reference value Direct connection to QCPU and CPU device point 32767 points setting transmission speed 115200bps When the block setting number to 1 about 17 seconds When the block setting number to 2048 about 4 minutes c Forexecuting the saving loading of device value with advanced recipe file which has been moved or whose name has been changed Adjust Recipe File setting of advanced recipe setting with GT Designer3 to file which has been moved or whose name has been changed After the setting has been changed download the advanced recipe setting to GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 6 Logging information z E Function of logging information Logging files created with the logging function be copied deleted or renamed etc 2 Without using a you can manage logging files on the GOT E Eug 5 For details of the logging function refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Function Description Reference E Qa Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed
109. of the liquid crystal screen and backlight please consult your nearest sales office or FA center For the life of the liquid crystal display screen or backlight refer to the following gt 3 2 Performance Specifications 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 1 17 1 Daily Inspection E Daily inspection items No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Check for loose Retighten screws within the specified torque 1 Installation status of GOT Securely mounted 9 b mounting screws range Retighten screws with Loose terminal screws Not loose Retighten terminal screws screwdriver 2 onneani Proximate solderless status Visual check Proper intervals Correct terminals Loose connectors Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing screws Dirt on protection sheet Visual check Not outstanding Replace with new one Usage 3 status attachment Foreign material Visual check gt 8 4 Protective Sheet 17 2 Periodic Inspection No foreign matter sticking Remove clean For the model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure refer to the following E Yearly or half yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Ambient Display section 0 to 50 t t o
110. of the screen FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA Al CONTROL Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow If returns to the self check by touching the upper left part judge that the upper left area operates normally U 0 a 2 Ed 9 3 n Ww a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 13 14 2 Self Check 14 2 5 I O check E check function The I O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other If I O check ends normally the communication interface and the connection cable hardware are normal To execute I O check the communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from GT Designers Note that the GOT restarts when this function is performed For the details related to the installation of the communication driver refer to the following gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 Communication drivers inapplicable to I O check When the following communication drivers are used the I O check cannot be executed Connection type Communication driver Connection to MITSUBISHI PLC Ethernet connection Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Connection to YASKAWA PLC YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Ethernet YASKAWA Connection to YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Ether
111. power of GOT and controller e Install the OS to GOT Check that the OS is installed to GOT been B nij gt Lr Bo cx da o Z now Download project data Turn on the controller power and check that the GOT recognizes the controller Check that the monitoring is normal e gt Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions C37 7 WIRING 57 Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 7 37 Controller manuals gt 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 3 Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals gt Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features Mee 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration OVERVIEW The overall configuration of GOT is as follows For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable refer to the following gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 f Bar code Protective Refer to 20 reader cover for oil 8 5 Sy bv iy 22 lt oc 2 e 5 SYSTEM
112. recipe folder names creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing reading or matching record data and deleting device values with the advanced recipe record list 13 2 5 Logging information Converting logging files in G1L format CSV or TXT format Deleting copying or moving logging files changing logging file names Deleting logging folders or creating a new logging folder 13 2 6 Memory card format Formatting a SD card or USB memory internal SRAM 13 2 7 Memory information Displaying the available memory of the GOT 13 2 8 USB device status display 9 2 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 2 Utility Function List Displaying the status of USB device 13 2 9 Item Functions overview Reference SRAM control Confirming the SRAM meer anga usage backing up or restoring the data in the 13240 Program data control SRAM user area and initializing the SRAM user area GOT data package acquisition Copying the OS special data and project data to a SD card or USB memory 13 2 11 System monitor monitor of PLC test function present value change of the buffer memory 4444 m monitor and the buffer memory of intelligent module Debug list editor Sequence program and parameter change of ACPU 14 1 2 FX list editor Sequence program and parameter change of FX PLC 14 1 3 Backup restoration Executing backups executing restorations and deletin
113. selector switch Can be selected among 110 OPEN and 3300 set to OPEN by default E a E z 4 Connector for the PLC communication D Sub 9pin Male for RS 232 connection E amp E C t lecti itch for the PLC Bye d Switch for selecting RS 422 or RS 232 set to RS 422 by default communication 6 USB port For connecting a PC for changing the communication driver 7 Connector for the PLC communication D Sub 9pin Female for RS 422 connection S 8 Protective cover Protects unused D sub connector USB port and switches lt Terminal block for th ial multi d amp 9 px Terminal block 5 pin with a protective cover Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6 communication z 10 Power supply connector 24VDC power supply connector insertion point A dedicated cable is included 11 Slider for installing the DIN rail 12 Mode selection switch Do not operate Slide switch Set to right by default When set to left the module does not operate normally o 2 8 9 5 Caution for compliance with EMC Directive e Please use the serial multi drop connection unit while installed in conductive shielded control panels Programmable logic controllers are open type devices that must be installed and used within conductive control panels Please secure the control panel lid to the control panel for conduction Installation within a control panel greatly affects the safety of the system and aids i
114. that shows the GOT abnormal termination and the byte with the error appears and then the GOT restarts in five seconds When the dialog box shown left appears check the following Check if the hardware has no problems C gt 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 16 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check 14 2 6 Ethernet status check E Ethernet status check function Ethernet status check is a function that sends a ping to check the connection status with the equipment on the Ethernet E Display operation of Ethernet status check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check 57 9 3 Utility Display GOT setup chgel Display check Tine setting amp display EB oysten ANN ii ble Touch panel check Program data control ni 1 0 check ER Debug amp self check E j Etherggt status check Self check lay Touch Touch Debug amp self check Ethernet status check Ethernet status check Ethernet status check IP address of the other terminal 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 17 14 2 Self Check 14 18 E Operation of Ethernet status check Ethernet status check IP address of the other terminal Ping transmission Ethernet status check IP address of the other terminal Ping transmission 14 2 Self Check If touch the select button of IP address of the other terminal a keyboard is displayed Enter t
115. the GOT After SD card access LED is cee off install the SD card which BootOS standard ABO Kind Name Size Date Time monitor OS or project data is stored in the SD card DIR GIBOOT 11 08 12 15 20 a interface of GOT 11 08 12 15 20 za 2 Switch ON the SD card access switch of GOT gba 855 Display program data control function E screen Utility on the and install BootOS 565 standard monitor OS from the SD card to GOT ase BO0KB 386 1584KB Property Data check Touch Install FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 4 The SD card access LED is lit during the install Now installing BootOS execution Do not pull out the SD card or power off the GOT while the SD card access LED is lit 5 The GOT restarts automatically after the installation Reboot is completed GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 6 After confirming normal restart switch off the SD card access switch of the GOT Confirm that the card access LED is not lit and remove the SD card from the SD card interface of the GOT CLEANING DISPLAY Wie Nep SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND INSTALLATION OF 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 7 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 8 2 When installing with USB memory OS information Kind Nane DIR DIR Size Date Time BO0KB 3861584KB
116. the SD card used as the uploading destination to GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 2 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 05 informat ion Select drive A Built in SD UU C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM 3 Touching Upload starts the uploading 05 information Size Date Time DIR 05 15 11 16 00 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 15520KB 3862528KB Install U 4 When the upload is completed the dialog shown left Upload is completed is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 9 13 2 Various Data Control 4 5 13 10 Property display operation Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder lame Date Time 08 Name Kind Version Size G10SMONT OUT 05 16 11 11 17 Standard monitor 0S Basic 05 27 60 1355K GIF 16516 FON 05 16 11 11 17 1Bdot Bothic Japanese Europe Basic 05 27 00 500 GIF 1251 6 FON 06 16 11 11 17 l2dot Font Japanese Europe Basic 05 27 00 407K G10SMONT G1D 06 16 11 11 17 System Screen Information Basic 05 27 61 3K Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected system file When data is normal Data normal When data is er
117. the data in the C drive This item explains using the A drive Before download operation 1 Setup cancel When the project data in the A drive is set up the project data cannot be downloaded to the C drive Execute setup cancel 7 b Setup cancel operation before downloading the project data 2 Project data to be stored in a SD card When storing the project data from GT Designer3 to SD card select C Built in flash memory for Project Data in the Boot Drive Communicate with Memory Card h EA Memory Card Write Core OS Write White Project D Boot OS Destination Memory Card C v GOT Type GT14 0 320x240 v Boot Project Data C Built in Flash Memory v 5 C Built in Flash Memory v C Built in Flash Memory 13 22 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 1 Mount the SD card USB memory to GOT Project information 2 Forthe SD card installation removal method refer to Kind Name Size Date Time 61 FXPROJECTI 20K 06 16 11 16 25 the following i 57 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 3 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 4 Touching Download button displays the screen shown on the left Touching OK button executes the download Download now 5 Ifthereisa project data of the same n
118. the dialog box shown left Record 1 Record Comment Process 1 setting 4 Touching the OK button starts loading record Do you want to load record COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 5 When loading is completed completion dialog box is displayed ted Process lete Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 47 13 2 Various Data Control 11 Record save operation Device value of a controller is saved in the selected record Adv vanced Recipe Information ie 2 b ereer d eme E Process 1 setting Process 2 setting Process 3 setting wrt Process 1 settin klaz lt gt ACIDE 11213 41516 7 8 9 0 AJ D F 6 H J K L L X C V B N M Enter Record No 1 Record Comment Process setting Do you want to save record Process completed 1 Selectthe recipe file and touch the Execute button 2 Asthe Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment for saving the device value Touching the Save record PLC GOT button displays the screen shown left For changing the record comment of saving destination input the record comment By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital a z English minuscule 0 9 Numeric Symbol Other than alphanumeric and s
119. touched without touching OK button the following dialog box will be displayed If the settings are not changed the dialog box is not displayed Operate following the message of the dialog box With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 9 9 3 Utility Display z E 2 Le gt E 5 E Keyboard operation 1 E 9 10 Touch the numerical value to be changed Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is displayed simultaneously The key board display position changes by the position of numerical value touched At the time of numerical input displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting X IN R5422 485 Cursor MELSEC FX R5232 Host PC USB Host PC Ethernet None 5 6 r 8 9 tel Jaj Cael Ber Keyboard Input numeric with keyboard 0 to 9 Key Input the numeric Enter Key Completes numeric input and closes the keyboard Cancel Key Cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard 14 Key Moves the cursor to the right or left side Available only if any selectable item is at the right left side of the cursor Del Key Del key is used when canceling the input by 1 character key and the key which is not mentioned do not function Touching Enter key completes numeric input and closes keyboard 9
120. usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control panel equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory Pollution levels An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment Grounding The following are applicable ground terminals Use them in the grounded state Be sure to ground the GOT for ensuring the safety and complying with the EMC Directive Protective grounding D Ensures the safety of the GOT and improves the noise resistance Functional grounding Z Improves the noise resistance 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 3 5 2 EMC Directive 2 uj Z gt Ao x GA ow OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 2 2 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration For information of the EMC Directive compliant models please consult with your nearest Mitsubishi product provider i GOT Use any of the following GOTs with which CE mark logo is printed on the rating plate When using a GOT other than shown below the system does not conform to the EMC Directive Item Model Hardware version of the GOT GT1455 QTBD GT145
121. 0 12 MAC ADD 12 34 56 78 90 12 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION n BootOS MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION BootOS Rating plate HD MADE IN JAPAN version MADE IN JAPAN Version GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GT1455 QTBDE IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 8 40W MAX SIN 1160003 A p 16 10 16 INSTALLATION COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 5 CoreOS Install CoreOS only when the GOT will not be the status of factory shipment even when BootOS is installed Normally the CoreOS has not to be installed ONT _ Precautions for installing CoreOS When executing the CoreOS installation once it cannot be canceled on the way Do not attempt the following to cancel the installation on the way The GOT may not operate Powering off the GOT Pressing the reset button of the GOT If the GOT does not operate please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative If the GOT does not recover even when installing the CoreOS the error may be caused by a hardware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative 16 5 1 Installing the CoreOS E Before installing the CoreOS 1 Installing procedure The CoreOS can be installed only when using SD card Installation via USB memory USB Ethernet is not available 2 Boot OS When i
122. 00V power PLC GOT Current status I O power 0 O equipment Main circuit power 0 Power equipment Main power Bim Isolation transformer power Measure for the BOZO c s amp equipment for which o power the power from the vo same systems usad Main circuit power equipment 0 Power equipment Connecting an isolation transformer as well as separating the wiring of the GOT power from that of the power of the I O equipment and power equipment reduces the influence of noise Effective Ineffective 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 18 9 TROUBLESHOOTING System configuration check sheet Fill in the brackets with the unit module name 1 System configuration of the GOT a GOT main unit b Communication interface c Cable between the PLC and GOT rm h If any other module etc is used please describe it d Cable length m 2 System configuration of the PLC a Power supply module b CPU module c Serial communication unit computer Used link module Not used d Network module Used O Not used e Interrupt module Used Not used f Positioning module Used Not used g Number of extension stages stages Entry area for recurrence when the malfunction occurred after the action is taken 3 Describe the operation sit
123. 0PSCB GT11 65PSCB GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW ForGT11 ST11H 50PSC GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW For GT10 Protective cover for oil GT05 90PCO GT05 80PCO GT05 70PCO GT05 60PCO GT05 50PCO GT16 50PCO GT10 40PCO GT10 30PCO GT10 20PCO USB environmental protection cover GT16 UCOV GT16 50UCOV GT15 UCOV GT14 50UCOV GT11 50UCOV Stand GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND A9GT 50STAND GT05 50STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 Atachment GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 50ATT 85 GT16 90XLTT GT16 80SLTT GT16 70SLTT GT16 70VLTT GT16 70VLTTA GT16 70VLTN Backlight GT16 60SLTT GT16 60VLTT GT16 60VLTN GT15 90XLTT GT15 80SLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 60VLTT GT15 60VLTN Multi color display board GT15 XHNB GT15 VHNB Connector conversion box GT11H CNB 37S GT16H CNB 42S Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H 50ESCOV GT16H 60ESCOV With wall mounting Attachment GT14H 50ATT Memory loader GT10 LDR Memory board GT10 50FMB Panel mounted USB port extension GT14 C10EXUSB 4S GT10 C10EXUSB 5S E Software Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works3 Description Abbrev
124. 1 Display of creation date and time The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the hardcopy information To display the updated creation date and time close the screen currently displayed by moving to the upper hierarchy folder etc and display the screen again Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 7 13 1 4 Display file 13 28 2 Displays the total number of the displayed files 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Hardcopy information operation 1 Display operation of Hardcopy information 1 Touching a drive of Select drive displays the information of the touched drive Hard copy information A PROJECT1 Size Date Time 151 06 28 11 14 27 yy 2 Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder d Touching a folder of displays the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy 4 Touching A w button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching 4 button scrolls up down the screen by one screen 5280KB 3862528KB 5 Touching a file name selects the file 6 Forthe operations of the delete copy and rename refer to the following gt This section 2 00l oN 57 This section
125. 10 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 4 16 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT sssssssssee enne nennen nnns 16 5 16 3 2 Installing using the program data control function Utility 16 7 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 9 16 5 Core QS s oet iat iad Setar ec Pt 16 11 16 5 1 Installing thieCOreOS Eee aee tei iet times 16 11 16 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed 16 13 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION TT Dally Inspections ssi e D ERR e E t on te coded tid 17 2 17 2 Periodic Inspection eet ede fed ad aeter 17 2 17 3 GleaningiMethod oon oe e i etin ed PL hm ER fedus 17 3 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery 17 4 17 5 Backlight Shutoff nnn nnne tnmen 17 7 17 5 4 Backlight shutoff detection and external 17 7 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 2 MR tatio que dela aste calli esed ue 18 1 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm sse eene nennen nennen enne 18 11 18 21 Error contents display iei ete e e d
126. 11 6 Z E 5 Security setting 11 9 amp zZ Utility call key 11 11 58 2 ti Su Touch panel calibration 11 13 gE 8 USB mouse keyboard setting 11 15 VNC server function setting 11 17 a Transparent mode Ch No 11 18 E Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings and setting the maximum number of backup 41 19 data S z 5 Backup restorati Ede Sep Setting the CPU No setting at backup to YES or NO 11 20 z5 l Trigger backup settings 11 21 ES m 5 aog A Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network 20 Behavior of duplicate IPs 11 22 afterwards License management license registration deregistration 11 25 11 1 Display Setting 5 a 5 a a o 2 a gt CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY 11 1 1 Function of Display Setting regarding display is possible E The items which can be set are shown below When each item part is touched the respective setting becomes possible 82 Item Description Setting range x 5 English English ul a B EE z38 Confirmation of the current language and switching language AE EAD Chinese Simplified Language can be performed regarding with the language displayed by pe Chinese Traditional utility and dialog box _ Deutsch
127. 13 67 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 10 SRAM control E Function of SRAM control The SRAM user area usage can be confirmed data in the SRAM user area can be backed up or restored and the SRAM user area is initialized For the available functions in the SRAM user area refer to the following gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions E Display operation of SRAM control Main menu 57 93 Utility Display Program data control 13 68 13 2 Various Data Control Program Data control SRAM control SRAM control SRAM control Function name Setting ID Setting name Size Date Time gue sys alarm an user alarm 1 24 5 07 22 11 13 00 0 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 25 UKB 475 KB ISSN Backup restoration 2 8MB 3 76B amp Initialize selected area Restoration all area 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL E Display example of SRAM control Number 1 SRAM contro Function name Setting ID Setting name Size Date Time 10 12 Item Check box 9 Initialize UN 11 13 14 Description Touch the check box to select or clear the item 2 Function name Displays the used functions in the order of the advanced system alarm advanced user alarm and logging function 3 Setting ID Displays the setting IDs The setting IDs of the advanced system alarm are not di
128. 1D7MC3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 S ored in CD ROM SH 080870ENG 1D7MC4 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 ored in CD ROM SH 080871ENG 1D7MC5 GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 S ored in CD ROM SH 080861ENG 1D7MB1 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 S QUICK REFERENCE Creating a project ored in CD ROM SH 080863ENG 1D7MB3 Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 Setting available functions on GT Designer3 Creating a screen displayed on the GOT Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Setting details for figures and objects Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action 1 2 2 2 Setting functions to use peripheral devices GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 E Connecting a controller to the GOT Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT for GT Works3 Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT Multi channel function Establishing communication
129. 2 Error Message and System Alarm Error Channel No Error message Action Bags Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe function by specifying the file register name File system error occurred in T Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file register 356 PLC x name Confirm file register Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When executing the recipe function specifying the file register name error occurred in PLC CPU drive 357 Error in specified PLC drive Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC x Confirm PLC drive CPU drive Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name PLC CPU file register could not be accessed Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC PLC file access failure 358 CPU drive file register name When you specify drive 0 execute the x Confirm PLC drive 7 recipe function again after changing to other drives Confirm whether the SD card or USB memory are write protected and execute the recipe function again When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register n
130. 3 gt This section 4 7 Touching x button closes the screen COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 29 13 2 Various Data Control 13 30 2 Deletion operation Deletes selected files x 5280KB 3862528KB Fi le Del Copy Rename Delete file name SNAPOOO1 Delete now Delete is completed 7 Touch and select the file to delete 2 Touching Del button displays the screen mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed 4 Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Copy operation Copies the selected file 1 Touch and select the file to copy Hard copy information PROJECT T Name Size Date DIR BMP SNAPOOO1 151K 06 28 11 14 27 rj Touching Copy button displays the message Please select a destination in the left bottom of the Screen Time 3 Ifthe copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders 5280KB 3862528KB 4 Touching Exec button displays the dialog box
131. 3 When limiting the display and operation of the utility When limiting the display and operating users set a password to the GOT using the GT Designer3 If a user tries to display the main menu of the utility the password input screen is displayed For details on setting passwords refer to the following gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 12 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration 2 E Touch panel calibration setting function Touch panel reading error can be corrected 2 Normally the adjustment is not required however the difference between a touched position the object position E may occur as the period of use elapses 5 When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs correct the position with this function 2 Before adjustment After adjustment E E 5828 Bus FE The Run will operate though you The Stop button can be touched intended to touch the Stop button without fail 2 9 2 2 o 2 a a Hm 7 p 9 9 DISPLAY AND Display operation of Touch panel calibration Main menu GOT setup Operation 5 9 3 Utility Display Key sensitivity x 8 Key r
132. 48 348 aD 2298 04 6 1 13 20 Power mod Pop up generated alarms regardless of the screen E Displaying error code and error message in a list Advanced system alarm display If error has occurred error code and error message can be displayed on the list set with the screen Multiple errors can be displayed or the history of display can be recorded Occurred Message Restore Check 74 04 6 1 10 25 oaen 8 05 Fuse error 11 25 10 45 Create screen to display alarms and confirm the details of the alarms and take measures 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 11 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION APPENDICES E Checking error messages with the utility Utility The error code and error message can be checked with the system alarm display of the utility when the object is not set gt 14 3 System Alarm Display Error code and reference manual E Channel No ul Error code Description storage Reference source destination 01699 Error code of CPU for ACPU User s manual of the ACPU connected with GOT Value of D9008 Error code of the following controllers Controller FXCPU GS263 User s manual of the controller connecte
133. 5 POINT c Before using advanced recipe information 5 For writing reading into from a controller with this function or editing of advanced recipe file on the personal computer refer to the following manual Specifications and operating procedure are described E s GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions T eae 225 E Function of advanced recipe information BED For the advanced recipe file used in advanced recipe function copy delete file output are available In addition it is possible to writing reading into from a controller by using this function without creating the screen to 0 operate the advanced recipe Advanced recipe setting of GT Designer3 is required E Function Description Reference a9 c Z25 Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 35 13 37 Rs g ri 359 G1P CSV conversion file of advanced recipe file is converted to CSV file 13 38 B n pol G1P TXT conversion G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to Unicode text file 13 38 S GIE CSV file or Unicode text file is converted to G1P file of advanced recipe file 13 39 A a conversion og Advanced recipe 5 ao information screen Del File or folder is deleted 13 40 8 2 5 File is copied 13 41 E 5 0 Move File is moved 13 42 E Cae Rename File name is changed 13 43 Create Folde
134. 5 QTBDE Version C or later GT1455 Q GT1450 QMBD GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QLBD GT1450 Q Q Version C or later GT1450 QLBDE Checking method of hard ware version Confirm the hardware version with the rating plate of the GOT GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GT1455 QTBDE IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 15 6W MAX SIN 1160003 MAC ADD 12 34 56 78 90 12 T MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION rdware MADE IN JAPAN version 80M1 IND CONT EQ t US LISTED E Connection method Use the following methods to connect with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive O Compliant with EMC Directive x Not compliant with EMC Directive Connection method GT14 Direct connection to CPU Computer link connection x CC Link connection via G4 x Ethernet connection GOT multi drop connection x Other connections o 1 When connecting the GOT to other controllers as a PLC manufactured by other company create the cable by the user and configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device Connected devices If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi products MELSEC Q series MELSEC L series MELSEC QnA MELSEC A series or MELSEC FX series please refer to the EMC Directive compliance manual for that specific device 5 4 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 EMC Directive E About the cabl
135. 5 SGTKEY P E Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation former Yamatake Corporation OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO El Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co Ltd CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi Ltd FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC CO LTD PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation ALLEN BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC I
136. 6 ChNo 85232 9 Host PC ChNo USB 9 Host PC ChNo Ethernet None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External device 9 connection Assign Ethernet Channel Driver assign 1 AJ 1QC24 MELDAS C6 2 None 8 Barcode 9 Host PC Modem CH Dr i vag assign OK Change Change Change lt a Change assignment Channel No 1 Please select communication driver None MELSEC FX 1 24 MELDAS A QnA L QCPU L QU7 1024 Y Continued to next page 1 Install communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 to GOT Download of Communication Setting from drawing software is not required After installing communication driver touch the Channel Driver assign button in Communication Setting 2 Touch the Change assignment button on the displayed screen as shown left As the communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 installed in the GOT is displayed touch it 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 Communication setting 4 The screen returns to the Channel Driver assign screen and touch the OK button Channe l Dr ive 1 A QnA L GCPU L QJ71C24 2 None 5 Touch x button to return to the Communication 8 Barcode Setting screen 9 Host PC Modem 6 Confirm that the selected communication driver
137. AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs E Display operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs Main Menu 57 9 3 Utility Display Nain Menu x GOT setup GOT setup ickup restoralion setting pal Behavior of dupRwqte IPs Behavior of duplicate IPs Behavior of duplicate IPs Behavior of duplicate Ips Behavior when a device of the same IP address as the GOT s address joins the network Do not maintain a network connection E Setting operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs Behavior of duplicate Ips 7 Touching the setting item changes the setting items Maintain a network connection rec Behavior when a device of the same The GOT stays connected to the network when a IP address as the GOT s address device with the same IP address as that of the joins the network GOT is added to the network afterwards A system alarm occurs Do not maintain a network connection Do not maintain a network connection The GOT is disconnected from the network when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards fff 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents X Touching x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 23 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 1 Precautions for selecting Do not maintain
138. AWA PC link module GT09 C30R40302 6T 3m GT09 C100R40302 6T 10m GT09 C200R40302 6T 20m GT09 C300R40302 6T 30m RS 422 cable GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller GT09 C30R40304 6T 3m GT09 C100R40304 6T 10m GT09 C200R40304 6T 20m GT09 C300R40304 6T 30m GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9pin conversion cable RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20302 9P 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA converter Connection cables for Allen Bradley PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Contents name length GT09 C30R20701 9S 3m For connecting GOT to Allen Bradley PLC RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20702 25P 3m For connecting GOT to Allen Bradley Adapter Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Model name GT09 C30R20801 9S Cable length 3m Contents For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter Connection cables for SHINKO indicating controller PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Model name GT09 C30R21401 4T SD card Sold separately Product name Cable length 3m Model name Contents For connecting GOT to SHINKO indicating controller Contents SD card L1MEM 2GBSD SD memory card 2GB L1MEM 4GBSD SDHC memory card 4GB
139. Abbreviation of GT1675M STBA GT1675M STBD GT1675 GT1675M V Abbreviation of GT1675M VTBA GT1675M VTBD GT1675 VN Abbreviation of GT1675 VNBA GT1675 VNBD GT1672 GT1672 VN Abbreviation of GT1672 VNBA GT1672 VNBD GT1665M S Abbreviation of GT1665M STBA GT1665M STBD GT1665 GT1665M V Abbreviation of GT1665M VTBA GT1665M VTBD GT1662 GT1662 VN Abbreviation of GT1662 VNBA GT1662 VNBD GT1655 GT1655 V Abbreviation of GT1655 VTBD GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 GT16 Handy GOT GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD GT1585 GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT157 0 GT1575 V Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1560 GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GoT1000 CT1550 GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD Series GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT157L1 1560 GT155 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD GT1450 GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QMBD 1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT1450 Q GT1275 GT1275 V Abbreviation
140. About the displayed file The files other than that for advanced recipe are not displayed on the advanced recipe information screen 2 Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 57 13 1 4 Display file GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 35 13 2 Various Data Control 13 36 2 Advanced recipe record list screen Touching the Execute button on the advanced recipe information screen after selecting the advanced recipe file this screen appears Records selected in each advanced recipe file can be displayed or saved loaded Advanced Recipe Record List File Name A NJJJJ GTP Setting No 2 Name product AttrRecord Comment sd 1 Process 1 setting 2 Process 2 setting 3 Process 3 setting Load record Save record Match recordsDelete Device B T PLC PLC 60T GOTSPLC Value Number Item Description 1 No Record No of advanced recipe file is displayed Attribution of record is displayed Attribution of record can be changed with GT Designer3 2 Record be loaded saved Record whose value is selected VP Record only for loading Record whose value is selected and cannot be changed Blank Record only for saving Record whose value is deleted or not selected P Record unusabl
141. CONTROL 4 The completion dialog box appears when the restoration is completed Touching the OK button closes the dialog box 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 71 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Operation to back up all data in the SRAM user area SRAM contro Function name Setting ID Setting name Size Date Time Advanced sys alarm user alarm 1 24 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 n 0 5 07 22 11 13 00 25 0KB 475 0KB 2File Backup restoration Drive 2 8NB 3 76B Restoration Initialize all Initialize selected area The SRAM data will be backed up to It may take a few minutes before the process ends Do not turn off the GOT until the process is completed Do you want to execute backup Do you really want to execute The backup file already exists Created date 11 06 10 14 08 Do you want to overwrite the fi le 1 To back up data in the SRAM user area to a drive Select the drive where the data is to be stored and then touch the Backup all area button The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To back up all data in the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the backup touch the Cancel button When touching the OK button in 2 the dialog box shown left appears for recheck Touching the OK button start the backup Touching the Cancel button cancels the backup When
142. CTION eom COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP Pattern 4 Shape check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and interval are displayed visually in order it is normal Touching the upper right part of the screen returns to the Display check screen Y an To Display check TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL he 4 The main screen image after the screen information read and write is executed Le 1 0 a 2 Ed 9 3 n a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 9 14 2 Self Check 14 2 3 Font check E Font check function The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT The character data of the font is displayed on the upper left part of the screen one by one E Display operation of Font check Main Menu Debug amp self check Self check Cs 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu x Jebug amp seli chec Communication setting Debug 907 setup Self check 8 Time setting amp display Program data control Self check Debug amp Self check Display check Drawing check Foniggheck EY T abort switch continue
143. Commercially available SD card 1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to Operation Check Results of Third Party SD Cards on GT14 Model Hime T P 0089 separately available or contact your loca distributor 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 5 2 2 System Equipment UL cUL OVERVIEW c E lt 14 e SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION USB memory Sold separately Model name 2 models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available or contact your local distributor Contents Product name USB memory Commercially available USB memory 12 Battery Sold separately Battery for clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value Battery 3 GT11 50BAT advanced alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area backups 3 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit Stand Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Stand GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 Protective cover for oil Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Protective cover for oil GT05 50PCO For 5 7 GOT Protective sheet Sold separately
144. D software package for process control MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SWEIDNC MTW2 E MT Developer Abbreviation of SWLIRNC GSV type integrated start up support software for motion controller Q series MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SWLIDNC MRCZ2 E type Servo Configuration Software MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJWL SETUPLE type Servo Configuration Software FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software FR SWLT SETUP WE NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator FX Configurator FP Abbreviation of parameter setting monitoring and testing software packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWLEIDSC FXSSC E FX3U ENET L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL E RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software 3D 11C WINE MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component VersionL1 SWLIDSC ACT E SWLEIDSC ACT EA MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet VersionL SWLID5C SHEET E SWLID5C SHEET EA QnUDVCPU amp LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of QQNUDVCPU amp LCPU Logging Configuration Tool SW1DNN LLUTL E E License key for GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviations and generic terms License Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT1
145. Do you want to proceed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 79 13 2 Various Data Control Edit operation Edit the operator information stored in the GOT 1 Select the operator information to be edited with Operator information management peratorName ID Level Update touching the operator information OPOQOT 100 10 2012 22 E 0P0002 UA 2 Touch the Edit button OPOO03 1003 12 2012 07 22 Add Edit Delete Undo Drive in use Import Export Save Operator information edit The Operator information edit screen is displayed and then touch an item to be edited OperatorName OPOO01 Operator ID 01 a Level Level Password Make a permanent password Password AAO OK Make a permanent password Use ext auth ID Ext auth ID 1 Use ext auth ID e Ext auth ID For how to edit operator information refer to the following lt This section 4 OK Cancel 4 Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is added The operator information editing process is completed Touch the Cancel button or the button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed If you close the screen before pressing OK button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed 13 80 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COP
146. Doing so can cause the IP address duplication The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address 192 168 0 18 The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with GOT Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in the User s Manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the panel tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short or malfunction Also undertightening can disable waterproof or oil proof effect Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Also distortion of the GOT or the panel may disable waterproof or oil proof effect Never drop cutting chips and electric wire chips into the ventilation window of the GOT when you drill screw holes or perform wiri
147. ED E General notes on Power supply This equipment must be supplied by a UL Listed or Recognized 24V DC rated power supply and UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 4A or a UL Listed Class 2 power supply E Using GOT GOT is for use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1 Enclosure 5 2 EMC Directive For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive are required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products This product is designed for use in industrial applications Authorized Representative in the European Community Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Gothaer Str 8 40880 Ratingen Germany 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 1 5 1 UL cUL Standards 2 uj gt Ao x GA ow OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 2 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive Applied standard EMC Directives are those which require any strong electromagnetic force is not output to the external Emission electromagnetic interference and It is not i
148. ION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 11 13 2 Various Data Control Display example of Alarm information Alarm information screen Alarm information Storage file folder display screen Alarm information x Alarm information Select drive A NPROJECTI Je Name AAMOOO00 3 Size Date Time A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Number Item Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected When SD card or USB memory is not installed the following drives are not displayed SD card A Built in SD card USB memory E USB drive 1 Select drive Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder 2 Kind 2 a The file is indicated with an extension while the folder is indicated with DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc 13 2 2 Alarm information operation 4 Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed Displays the size in use and the
149. Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed is as follows Quick response Slow response Key sensitivity setting 8 T 6 5 4 3 2 Standard E Touch panel calibration For touch panel calibration operation refer to the following Key reaction speed 120ms gt 11 2 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration ll USB mouse keyboard setting For the USB mouse keyboard setting refer to the following 11 2 7 USB mouse keyboard setting E VNC server function setting Refer to the following for the VNC server function setting operation 11 2 8 VNC R server function setting 11 8 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 4 Security level change 2 e E Security level change functions Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch T To change the security level input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer3 E Security level setting Password setting gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 5 g m ob Restrictions on screen display Z ES The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT Sus Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT TE Szo E Display operation of Security level change Main menu GOT setup Operation 9 3 Utility Disp
150. Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 m Touch panel calibration Setting 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents USB mouse keyboard Setting Touching x button restarts the GOT and reflects OK s the setting contents 2 E Security setting For the security setting operation refer to the following gt 11 2 4 Security level change E Utility call key For the utility call key operation refer to the following 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting E Key sensitivity setting perat ion 1 Touching the setting items displays the keyboard Buzzer volume SHORT Enter the numerical value from the keyboard Window move buzzer ON Security setting Setting 2 The key response speed 1 corresponding to the Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity setting is displayed Key sensitivity Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 m Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touch panel calibration Setting Touching x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents 1 Relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed The larger the set value in Key sensitivity is the shorter the time taken from touching the touch panel until the GOT responds becomes E g decrease the value set for Key sensitivity when double touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once Decrease the reaction speed The relation between the
151. LAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Le 0 a 2 Ed 9 3 n Ww a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF RS232 communication check Error The following cause Connection error H W error parameter setting error Restart RS232 communication check Executing now RS232 communication check No error Restart RS232 communication check Error Verify 4 BYTE Restart After selecting Self the transferred data and received data are verified through the self loopback connector When the GOT cannot receive the data during the data transmission the dialog box shown left appears and the GOT restarts in five seconds When the dialog box shown left appears check the following e Check if the pins of the connector for self loopback check are incorrectly shorted e Check if the channel number for the RS 232 interface is set to 0 None in the communication setting of the GOT utility gt 10 1 3 Communication setting contents Check if the hardware has no problems gt 18 TROUBLESHOOTING During check the dialog box shown left is displayed 4 When the all checks ended normally the dialog box shown left is displayed And the GOT restarts in five seconds When an error occurs the dialog box
152. N CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 9 2 Utility Function List The items in the following list can be set operated on the utility screens Item Communication setting Communication setting Functions overview Assigning channel numbers and communication drivers to communication interfaces Reference 10 Setting communication parameters Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words canceling sequence program protection status When connecting to FX series CPU Setting whether to supply 5V power or not 10 Ethernet setting Displaying the contents of Ethernet setting changing the host Display Switching message languages Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF Adjusting brightness and contrast Inverting colors Operation GOT setup Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed Changing security levels 11 2 4 Setting the utility call keys 11 2 5 Adjusting the touch panel 11 2 6 Setting the USB mouse and keyboard 11 2 7 VNC server function setting 11 2 8 Transparent mode Setting the channel No to be used for the communication for the FA transparent function Backup restoration
153. ND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 49 13 2 Various Data Control 13 50 13 Device value delete operation The device value of selected record is deleted without value and changed to record only for reading The record name is not deleted File Name Setting No 2 Name product2 aS Process 1 setting Process 2 setting Process 3 setting Record No 1 Record Comment Process 1 setting Are you sure you want to delete Process completed 1 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to be deleted If the data of which attribution contains P can not be deleted Touching the Delete Device Value button displays the dialog box shown left Touching the OK button starts deleting device value The Processing screen message is displayed on the When deleting is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Precautions 1 When creating folder file a Number of characters set for folder or file name when creating folder file GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically pri
154. NSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD GOT server Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function GOT client Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3 Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit MODBUS RTU Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial communication MODBUS TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL E Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual IPOINT I Refers to the information r
155. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction e The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Before performing the test operations of the user creation mo
156. OPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 3 Using SD card that stores data with OS boot drive set to A drive GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Precautions on writing BootOS standard monitor OS in SD card or USB memory When writing BootOS standard monitor OS etc in the SD card or USB memory be sure to execute by the utility of other GOT GT Designer3 The installation is not executed properly with the SD card or USB memory to which uploaded from the utility of GOT or copied by software other than GT Designer3 Note the available capacity of the SD card or USB memory The available capacity of BootOS and standard monitor OS can be confirmed by To Memory Card of GT Designer3 Communicate with Memory Card Eee E Memory Card write eo E Core OS write White Data Project Data OS Special Bata Boot 05 Destination Memory Card Ir m WEE GOT 14 320 240 be written into the memory Boot cae Project Data C Built in Flash Memory _ x 05 C Euilt in Flash Memory Write Data Size means Project Data Kbyte untitled Projecti ee diss Capacity of standard monitor OS v Base Screen S v Common Settings Total 4702 Kbyte v Communication Settines addition to the above Communication Settings with GOT IP List use Okbyte GOT RAM E v Standard monitor OS 8 v Com
157. OT Removing the SD card or USB memory If the installation failure and the GOT malfunction occur take the following action If BootOS installation failed Install CoreOS 16 5 1 Installing the CoreOS f standard monitor OS installation failed Install BootOS L 16 3 1 Installing when starting the 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 2 The displayed message is different depending the installation condition of standard monitor OS When the screen 5 requesting operation is displayed operate the GOT according to the instructions on the screen 5 gt Operation procedure 1 When installing with SD card 1 Power OFF the GOT switch the SD card access S switch to OFF and install the SD card where the E BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is 5 22 stored the SD card interface of the T EE 2 Switch ON the SD card access switch of GOT FEE i 2 9 3 Power on GOT while pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen 1 point press installation 0 function z 4 BootOS or standard monitor OS is installed in 22 amp Now installing BootOS the built in flash memory The SD card access LED is lit during the install 5 execution aoe Do not pull out the SD card or power off
158. OT SET UP BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY lt amp a z Ed ns O me a oS Q e 5 e O z Q DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY STANDARD MONITOR OS ll SRAM control operation 1 Operation to initialize all or selected areas of the SRAM user area 1 Perform any of the following operations SRAM control Function name Setting ID Toinitialize all areas of the SRAM user area Setting name Size Date Time touch the Initialize all button Toinitialize selected areas of the SRAM user area select the check box of the area to be initialized and then touch the Initialize selected area button gv sys alarm 24 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 user alarm 0 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 25 0KB 475 0KB Initialize all Backup restoration Initialize selected area Restoration Example Dialog box when touching the Initialize all button 2 The dialog box shown left appears Caution Check the description of the dialog box To initialize Start initializing SRAM the SRAM user area touch the OK button This process may take a few minutes To cancel the initialization touch the Cancel button After completion of initialization GOT will be rebooted Do you want to initialize care 3 When touching the OK button 2 the dialog b
159. On the other hand they are not overwritten to the project data written to the GOT The changed settings are not reflected to the project data which is read from the GOT after changing the settings If the GOT data is copied with the GOT data package acquisition the change in the Ethernet setting screen is reflected to the copied data 10 16 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 3 Ethernet Setting Change of host 2 Touch the OK button 3 Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 17 10 3 Ethernet Setting NICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 10 18 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 3 Ethernet Setting 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION 2 SETTINGS GOT SET UP Lr o z i gt Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be displayed from the utility screen In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation the following settings can be set Item Description Reference Bist Language opening screen time screen save time screen save backlight battery alarm display and invert colors 11 1 ispla Pey Adjusting brightness and contrast 11 5 E e Buzzer volume window move buzzer volume key sensitivity key reaction speed touch detection mode
160. P 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 7 USB mouse keyboard setting E Function of USB mouse keyboard To install and use the USB mouse keyboard on the GOT set the USB mouse keyboard ll Display operation of USB mouse keyboard Main menu GOT setup Operation Window move buzzer Security setting Utility call key Key sensitivity Key reaction speed Standard Touch panel calibration GOT setup is Operation USB ngyse keyboard Setting USB mouse keyboard USB mouse keyboard setting Use USB mouse Inter lock with mouse cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type Japanese 106 keyboard E USB mouse keyboard setting operation 1 Touse the USB mouse touch the setting item of Use USB mouse The setting content is changed by touching YES die NO USB mouse kevboard setting Use USB mouse Inter lock with mouse cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard tvpe Japanese 106 keyboard Continued to next page 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 15 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 11 16 Use USB mouse Interlock with mouse NO cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type Japanese 106 keyboard Use USB mouse Inter lock with mouse
161. PU expansion board MINI DIN 8pin board connection cable GT01 C200R4 8P 20m E GT01 C300R4 8P 30m 2 0 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m pus RS 422 QnA A FXCPU direct For connecting GOT to QnA A Motion controller CPU A series FXCPU D 2 cable connection cable GT01 C100R4 25P 10m Sub 25pin computer link connection GT01 C200R4 25P 20m For connecting GOT to FA CNV CBL cable For connecting GOT to serial communication unit AJ71QC24 N R4 GT01 C300R4 25P 30m GT09 C30R4 6C 3m 2 C ter link fi GT09 C100R4 6C 10m lt For connecting to computer link module serial communication unit o cable GT09 C200R4 6C 20m 5 GT09 C300R4 6C 30m 85 CPU direct ti connection GT04 C30R2 6P 3m For connecting GOT to QCPU FX expansion board connection FX special GT01 C30R2 9S 3m For connec ing GOT to FXCPU expansion board D Sub im RS 232 adaptor connection data For connecting GOT to FXCPU special adaptor D Sub 9pin transfer cable 2 cable o FX special adaptor 2 GT01 C30R2 25P 3m For connecting GOT to FXCPU special adaptor D Sub 25pin lt connection a GT09 C30R2 9P 3m Computer link connection For connecting GOT to computer link module serial communication unit cable GT09 C30R2 25P 3m Connection cables for OMRON PLCs Sold separately STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE Product Cabl
162. Proceed to 1 d Screen saving is being performed The read device of the system information may O Lit in orange saving status have been turned ON when the device was set and the screen was switched to the forced screen Check the setting of the read device When no problem is found in the setting proceed to 1 d Blinks in green orange The backlight has run out Replace the backlight If the GOT is not restored proceed to 1 d The power is not supplied L1 Not lit may be faulty When the power is supplied the GOT hardware Check if the power is supplied If the GOT is not restored proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation d Screen display The screen is completely black The liquid crystal display or BootOS may be faulty Perform the following in order 1 Reinstalling BootOS 2 Reinstalling standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by 1 and 2 perform the following 3 Reinstalling CoreOS and then standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by the above operations proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation The screen is completely white The GOT hardware may be faulty Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation The GOT hardware may be faulty Example A vertical line is displayed A line is displayed on the Screen O Other faulty displays Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigat
163. SEC FX registration deletion cancellation or protection of the Transmission Speed BPS Retry 0 TIMES Timeout Time SEC Delay Time O0 ms ICATION SETTING FACE SETTING Keyword 21 1 Regist Keyword is registered 5 Touching the Regist key displays the Registration Selection screen For a FX PLC that is not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard for the keyword input of 2 is displayed Select Keyword or Keyword and Customer keyword When the Enter key is touched the selection is completed and the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed Registration Selection Selection Description When Keyword is selected Only keyword can be registered When Keyword and Customer keyword is selected The Customer Keyword can be registered after registration of the keyword 1 For details on FX PLC compatible with customer keyword refer to the manual of the PLC used The customer keyword allows the user to clear the protection set by a keyword However the protection cannot be deleted 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 11 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 2 When the registration is selected or the Regist key is touched on a PLC not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed in a pop up window When the keyword is input and the Enter key is touched registration is completed When
164. SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 3 Transparent Mode Setting 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting 2 The storage location for backup data be set For how to use backup restoration refer the following manual lt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 Set the following items with touching the items on the GOT Item Description Setting range Built in SD Ze The drive for storing backup settings including parameters and passwords ee id z E Dave TOF backnp esting for controllers can be selected E E 5 Default A Built in SD Card 8 A Built in SD Card FEE Drive for backup data The drive for storing backup data can be selected E USB memory See Default A Built in SD Card The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers Rise Time specified None Rise Time 0 Trigger backup setting 9 for each backup setting are met Default None E Set the maximum number of backup data to be stored LPS Setting range 0 to 50 2z5 Max of backup data When 0 is specified the does not check the number of backup data to 26 Default 10 Sain be stored lt go a u YES NO 858 Enable CPU No setting Set the CPU No setting at backup to YES or NO Default NO E Display operation of Backup restoration setting CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY Main men
165. T 4 Igi GOT setup Time setting amp display ca Program data control A Debug amp self check Y cz Touch the button Language 2 When touching menu call key Touching the menu call key while user created screen is displayed displays the main menu The menu call key is set in the position on the GOT screen upper left corner at factory shipment j Main Menu A Horizontal display Length display RURSUS A E i GOT setup Time setting amp display E Program data control A Debug amp self check Y Language gt The utility screen is a factory installed horizontal format screen that cannot be edited The menu call key can be set by the GOT utility or GT Designer3 For menu call key setting refer to the following 2 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 4 9 GOT Display and Operation Setting GOT Environmental Setting GOT Setup 1 Prohibited simultaneous 2 point presses Do not touch 2 points or more on the GOT screen simultaneously Touching 2 points or more simultaneously may activate a part other than the touched point 2 Pressing time of the utility call key When having set Pressing time of the menu call key setting screen to other than O s keep pressing the touch panel for the period set to Pressing time or more before leaving the finger from the touch
166. TANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 3 14 2 Self Check ll Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following 5 8 1 SD Card 8 2 USB Memory When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arisen Replace the SD card or USB memory or built in flash memory C drive For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Built in SD card A drive memory check install the SD card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory For the USB drive E drive memory check install the USB memory before carrying out the check operations 1 Select a drive to check in the Select Drive screen DRIVE Memory check and touch Check button Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM 2 Touching Check button displays the dialog box on Internal Flush memory area the left write read check Selecting OK button displays the numeric keyboard window 2 Selecting Cancel button returns to the initial menu Touch to input password o and touch Enter key Touching Enter key execut
167. Touch the Assign Ethernet I F button Communication Setting Communication Setting Standard F Setting ChNo RS422 485 1 R nR L GCPU L OJTTC24 ChMo RS232 3 Host PC ChNo USB 3 Host PC ChNo Ethernet None Definition of ChNo D None 1 2 FA device B External device 9 PC connection E pp assign OK 2 After the screen shown left is displayed touch the Ethernet I F assignment channel number specification menu BOX when ChNo Ethernet standard I F changing the channel number None z LE TEthernet standard VP C 10 1 4 M Channel number setting operation Q None 3 For changing the parameter settings touch the driver Ethernet F assignment display BOX ChNo Ethernet standard I F 10 2Communication Detail Setting MELSEC FX Ethernet standard F 4 None Touching the OK button reflects the changed settings Touching x button returns the screen to the Communication Setting screen Definition of ChNo D None 1 2 FR device ther es 5 Touch the OK button in the Communication Setting screen 6 Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings 10 6 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 Communication setting E 5V power supply operation The following describes how to ope
168. UTILITY FUNCTION 9 3 Utility Display 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION In Communication Setting the communication interface names and the related communication channel communication driver names display and channel numbers are set Moreover in Communication Detail setting the communication interface details are set Communication parameters oH setting BES Rak Function Description Reference E S5 The setting contents of the communication interface can be checked or changed 10 1 E Communication Setting 659 Whether to supply 5V power be set 10 1 Ethernet setting The contents of the Ethernet setting can be checked and the host can be changed 10 15 2 10 1 Communication setting 225 seh is A 10 1 1 Communication setting functions agp 258 Function Description Channel Driver assign Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name of the device connected using the E E Assign Ethernet I F oa Ethernet interface 298 Channel No Ch No setting Set the channel numbers of the communication interface Standard interface 8 3 5 Communication parameters setting Set communication parameters of communication devices E g E 22 5V power supply Set whether to supply 5V power or not when the
169. W GT Designer3 Version 34L _ Touching Property button after selecting the project data to display the property displays the property as shown left In property display the following information is displayed Item Description Date Displays the creation date of the file Author Displays the author of the project data Drawing S W Displays name and version of the drawing version software by which the project data is created Touching A button scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching 2 button scrolls up down the screen by one screen Touching x button closes the property display and returns to the previous screen 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 21 13 2 Various Data Control lt Q 5 ir O 9 gt hi 9 9 ae E 22 9 FILE DISPLAY AND E oS 5 Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected project file When data is normal 1 Touch Data check button after selecting a data check target file Data normal The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check 2 Touching OK button closes the dialog When data is erroneous Data error EIN 6 Download operation setup operation a Download operation Transfers the project data stored in the A drive Built in SD Card or E drive USB drive to the C drive Flash Memory The GOT monitors using
170. Y PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control Delete operation Delete the operator information stored in the GOT 7 Select the operator information to be deleted with touching the operator information Operator information management L Administrator OP0001 1001 10 2012 07 22 0 0002 1002 12 2012 07 22 OP0003 Drive me A 2 Touch the Delete button and then the dialog box Target operator shown left is displayed OPO005 Do your HO dlete the operators Touch the OK button and then the selected operator information is deleted Touch the Cancel button and then the delete operation is canceled 4 When the delete operation is completed a The operator information deletion completion dialog box is displayed process is completed 5 Touch the OK button and then the dialog box is closed COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 81 13 2 Various Data Control 13 82 d Undo operation Restore the current operator information to the previous saved one Operator information management peratorName Administrator OPO001 OPOO02 OPOO03 ID Level Update 1001 10 2012 07 22 2012 01 22 1002 12 1008 12 2012 07 22 Do you want to discard the unsaved operator information and restore the data to the state before editing Password Admin password authentication Enter the
171. a without starting the upload is deleted Do you want to execute Touching OK button executes an overwrite upload to the project data of the same name Touching Cancel button cancels the upload 5 When the uploading is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Yp icad s Touching OK button restarts the GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 25 13 2 Various Data Control lt a gt 5 ir O 9 Be gt hi 9 9 ae E 22 9 FILE DISPLAY AND RENS pneu 13 26 Setup cancel operation By setup cancel setup is canceled Disable setup Execute now Disable setup is completed Restart now Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive Touching Upload button displays the screen shown on the left Touching OK button executes the setup cancel When the setup cancel is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching OK button restarts the GOT After restart the GOT monitors with the project data in the C drive 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 4 copy information 2 E Function of hardcopy information Carries out delete and move to the file created by the hardcopy function 2 i gt For details of hard copy function refer to the following manual E L gt GT Designer3 Vers
172. actory shipment status OS boot drive set to the A drive G1BOOT Required for the GOT operation as the monitoring function of GOT installation and deletion of the OS file or project data touch key control or display function of th d guid Required for displ d ti f th MONDE mediei Syst dat C G1SYS Standard ae eee Not installed in GOT at factory shipment it Syst t infi tion fil Install it fi GT Desi 3 or the SD card e or ystem screen management information file is dbi esigner3 or the card or SDcard that stores dala with TrueType numerical font R y OS boot drive set to the A drive At installation select Mincho or Gothic for ANGISYS 12 dot standard font Gothic the 16 dot standard font i 16 dot standard font Mincho 16 dot standard font Gothic 16 2 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS For the installation using GOT the SD card or USB memory storing BootOS or standard monitor OS is required For the method of writing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the SD card or USB memory the following three methods are available 1 To Memory Card from GT Designer3 gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or standard monitor OS has been installed s 13 FILE DISPLAY AND C
173. age 1000Vp p Noise width 1us by noise simulator of 30 to 100Hz noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth Insulation resistance 10MQ or larger by insulation resistance tester across power supply terminals and earth Applicable wire size 0 75 mm or more for power supply 2 mm more for grounding Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A E 4 Operation at momentary power failure The GOT continues to operate even upon 5ms or shorter instantaneous power failure The GOT stops operating if there is extended power failure or voltage drop while it automatically resumes operation as soon as the power is restored a 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 4 PARTS NAME 4 1 Front Panel OVERVIEW 4 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS m lt No Name Description 2 2 as 1 Display section Displays the utility screen and the user creation screen E a 2 Touch panel For touch switch operation on the utility screen and the user creation screen Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 3 POWER LED a 9 Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb 2 E Not lit Power is not supplied o 4 Logo label Removable
174. ailable memory of the GOT O USB device status display Displaying the status of USB device O x x SRAM control Back up restoring and initializing of the SRAM user area GOT data package acquisition Copying the OS special data and project data to a CF card or USB memory O O x APPENDICES App 7 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function Applicable x Not applicable Not required DEW Item Functions overview emn eee Setting Selecting a base clock O O O Time setting amp display Displaying and setting the clock current time O Displaying the battery status O O x System monitor O O x FX list editor O O x Debug A list editor O O x Backup restoration O x O Memory check O O x Drawing check Debug amp self check Font check Self check Touch panel check O O x 1 O check O O x Ethernet status check O x x System alarm display Displaying error code and error message O O x GOT start time Displaying GOT start date and time current time accumulated operating hours Clean Displaying the screen for cleaning the display O O x App 8 APPENDICES Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions a z lt When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based the transport regulations om go Ze Appendix 3 1 Relevant models Eu 2G 22 The battery f
175. ails of system information refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 17 5 MAINTENANCE AND ec E Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states 1 Disposal precautions In EU member states there is a separate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT Symbol This symbol is for EU member states only The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 Information for end users and Annex II The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products a Labeling To mark
176. allation will be cancelled Confirm the GOT type and perform Core OS write again OE on the GOT E The version of OS is not acceptable to this GOT 5 5 Installation will be cancelled Install CoreOS from the latest GT Designer3 a Confirm the version of OS Memory card access switch is off cm Installation will be cancelled The SD card access switch is off Turn the switch on and restart the GOT 2 g Turn on the switch and restart the GOT 2 E E RHE ae eZ Br 5 0 SES Cae COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND INSTALLATION OF 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 13 16 5 CoreOS 16 14 16 INSTALLATION COREOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 5 CoreOS 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS N WARNING When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Undertightening can
177. ally available RFID controller 4 4 models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT 1000 series T10 0039 separately available or contact your local distributor RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter Sold separately RS 232 485 signal conversion For GOT multi drop connection multi channel function connection adapter temperature controller connection and MODBUS R RTU connection GT14 RS2T4 9P 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 7 2 2 System Equipment OVERVIEW z lt 14 e o STANDARDS AND SYSTEM EMC DIRECTIVE PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 System Equipment 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 General Specifications z gt Item Specifications Display section 0 to 50 C Operating ambient pey 2 Other than temperature 0 to 55 when horizontally installed O to 50 when vertically installed display section zo ne Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 C 2 gt Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90 non condensing WBT 39 C 18 Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 non condensing Frequenc Acceleration Sweep count i Wi y amplitude j 2 Under 5 to 8 4Hz 3 5mm 10 times each in E Conformsto
178. ame Processing from another other peripherals carry out the process to the file register 359 peripheral device x Wait until the processing of other peripherals end and execute the recipe Execute it after function again RA AE Zero division occurred by the data operational expression O divisor division error 2 360 Review the data operational expression so that the divisor should not x Confirm operation expression become 0 361 Specified device No is out of The entered file number is out of range Check the entered file number and enter a valid value 1 to 9999 When controllers are controlled with the GOT s time action function the 362 Invalid device value in time set No is our of range or the set device values regarding the operation T action setting settings are out of range or invalid Set valid values 370 Upper and lower limit value error The setting of lower upper limit value is Upper limit lt Lower limit Confirm value setting Correct the setting so as to be Upper limit amp inequalityLEM Lower limit Available memory of the USB memory is insufficient Insufficient USB drive capacity 380 Confirm the available memory of the USB memory and increase the x Confirm the drive capacity MR memory if it is low 381 USB drive is not installed orina If the USB memory is not installed install it X removable state If the USB memory is ready to
179. ame in the C Same named project data has already drive the screen shown on the left is displayed down loaded Current Target without starting the download Built Version 207H 201H Touching OK button executes an overwrite Built Date 02 01 05 m c download to the project data of the same name Bui lt Time ESO 16 17 4 Touching Cancel button cancels the download Author E Downloading continue 22 ZO crc iis BSE ul 288 6 When the download is completed the dialogue box Download is completed shown on the left is displayed Restart now Touching OK button restarts the GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 23 13 2 Various Data Control Setup operation Sets the project data stored in the A drive Built in SD card to be used in the GOT The GOT monitors using the monitor data in the A drive Before setup operation When storing project data from GT Designer3 to SD card select A Standard SD Card for Project Data in Boot Drive Communicate with Memory Card Q Boot OS Memory Card Write OE Core OS Write Write Data Project Data OS Special Data Destination Memory Card v GOT Type 14 20 240 J Boot Project Data AStandard SD Card v 05 C Built in Flash Memory v Project information C Built in Flash Memory Size Date Time Execute now Setup is completed
180. andard i B E SD Card x 3 e GOT SD card GOT B t USB memory BootOS or OS file standard monitor OS E upload ex installation We L2 Install OS from GOT to GOT a las 22 using CF card USB memory gt o xo UU y 4 Install the SD So SD card USB memory card USB a memory GOT BE 288 1 When execute installation with USB memory standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance For the writing of OS in GT Designers refer to the following a gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals gH 2 ux lt 02 m 835 CoreOS In 16 1 to 16 4 of this chapter only BootOS and standard monitor OS are described For CoreOS refer to the following N 37 16 5 CoreOS 2 2 NAV SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND INSTALLATION OF 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 1 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation Under mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility OS name Function overview Storage location Built in flash memory Required for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT C G1BOOT BootoS Installed at factory shipment BootOS can be installed from GT Designer3 or the SD card When installed from GT Designer3 or the SD card that stores data with SD card GOT is initialized to be the f
181. annel Driver assign Channel No can be assigned to the communication driver installed in the GOT a Not writing Communication Setting in drawing software Without writing Communication Setting in drawing software communication with a controller is available after assigning the channel No with this function s 10 1 4 Bl Channel Driver assign operation b When changing the assignment of the communication driver to the channel in the Utility Without using drawing software the assignment of communication drivers to channels can be changed When changing a communication driver the alternative communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance 2 Standard interface display BOX Display the communication interface included as standard in GT14 There are the following 4 types GOT front face GOT rear face m HN y SaL s 50 sp BATTERY RESET 100 SD Log A q USB interface Standard interface RS 422 interface Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface Ethernet interface Standard interface RS 232 For commun
182. ant to move the file Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen cox 5 When any file with the same name exists in the Target file ARPO001 G1P destination folder the dialog box shown left Do you want to overwrite the file appears without starting the movement Touching the OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels moving 6 When moving is completed completion dialog box Process completed is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 42 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 7 Rename operation File name to be used in advanced recipe is changed LINE A RECIPS AIS D F G H J K L L X C V B N M Enter Before ARPOO01 G1P After LINE A_RECIPE G1P 4 Change fi lename Process completed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 1 Touch and select the file to change the name Touching Rename button displays the screen shown left Input the file name to be changed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Touching OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button c
183. ard unit GT15 CFCD CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Sound output unit GT15 SOUT 1 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 CO8CF set E Option Abbreviations and generic terms CF card Memory card Description GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM 256MC GT05 MEM 512MC GT05 MEM 1GC GT05 MEM 2GC GT05 MEM 4GC GT05 MEM 8GC GT05 MEM 16GC SD card L1MEM 2GBSD L1MEM 4GBSD Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC Option function board GT16 MESB GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT11 50FNB GT15 MESB48M Battery GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT Protective Sheet GT16 90PSCB GT16 90PSGB GT16 90PSCW GT16 90PSGW GT16 80PSCB GT16 80PSGB GT16 80PSCW GT16 80PSGW GT16 70PSCB GT16 70PSGB GT16 70PSCW GT16 70PSGW GT16 60PSCB GT16 60PSGB GT16 60PSCW GT16 60PSGW GT16 50PSCB GT16 50PSGB GT16 50PSCW GT16 50PSGW GT16 90PSCB 012 GT16 80PSCB 012 GT16 70PSCB 012 GT16 60PSCB 012 GT16 50PSCB 012 GT16H 60PSC For GT16 GT15 90PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSCB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB GT15 70PSCW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSCB GT15 60PSGB GT15 60PSCW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSCB GT15 50PSGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW For GT15 For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 7
184. at E Function of the memory card format Format the SD card USB memory Internal SRAM E Display operation of Memory card Format Main menu Program Data control 57 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu X rogra x BOT setup nor orna ijj Time setting amp display Menor Progran data antral levice I ES Debug amp self E i contro lata package A E GOT data Memory card Format Program data control Move to Memory card format Memory card Format Memory card format Select Drive A Built in SD card D Internal SRAM COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 63 13 2 Various Data Control ll Memory card format operation Memory card format Select Drive A Built in SD card D Internal SRAM Format Caution f execute format operation all data on the SD card will be initialized Please do not remove SD card while formatting Format the SD card Format now Format is complete Restrictions on formatting Mount the SD card USB memory to GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following L7 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory Touch and select the drive to format by drive selection Touching Format button displays the password input screen Typing
185. ays the dialog mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file folder While executing Processing message appears on the screen Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog When it cannot be deleted the dialog box shown at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again gt 13 2 6 Precautions 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 57 13 2 Various Data Control COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 4 Copy operation Folder to be used in logging is copied Please select destination Execute Cancel Target file LOG600001 0001 61L Do you want to copy the file Target file LOG600001 0001 61L Do you want to Overwrite the file Process completed 1 Touch and select the file to 2 Touch the Copy button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folde
186. be removed install it again 2 Memory card is not formatted or in a format not conformed by 382 USB drive is not formatted x Reformat the USB memory 383 Unable to overwrite USB drive is USB memory is write protected x write protected Cancel the write protection of USB memory 384 USB drive error Replace USB USB memory is faulty drive Replace the USB memory 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 15 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION APPENDICES Error Channel No Error message Action code storage The time out error occurred during communicating Confirm the cable omission and status of the PLC Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message in the we case an error occurs when using the multi channel function Communication timeout i ae Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No in error 402 Confirm communication pathway O r modiles This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU becomes heavier ules when accessing other stations In such a case transfer the data of the other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host Put COM instruction when the PLC scanning is long Either of the overrun error parity bit error or flaming error was generated when the RS 422 RS 232 communication was received SIO status error TEA i uM Confirm the
187. ble Not required E Drawin g 2 Functions overview GT14 GT11 mi Ee Setting Assigning channel numbers and communication drivers to communication o interfaces E Communication Communication setting Setting communication parameters O O setting Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words canceling x 5 sequence program protection status When connecting to FX series CPU zi Ethernet setting Displaying the contents of Ethernet setting changing the host O 9 Switching message languages O O O Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time O Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving O O Display Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF O O o Adjusting brightness and contrast O 2 Z Inverting colors O m a Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer O O lt Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed O Changing security levels O O x Operation GOT setup Setting the utility call keys Adjusting the touch panel O O x Setting the USB mouse and keyboard Setting the channel No to be used for the communication for the FA Transparent mode O x transparent function Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings and setting the maximum number of backup data Backup restorati Trigger backup settings x Setting the CPU No setting at backup to YES
188. both device display and input by the programming tool or GOT are prohibited When All operation prohibition is selected device display and input are possible although operations by the programming tool are all prohibited 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10 13 UTILITY FUNCTION z a z e S gt 2 zZ E zz zu ae zu GE 2 OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 2 Delete Registered keyword is deleted 1 Touching the Delete key pops up a keyboard for keyword input 2 When the correct keyword is input and the Enter key is touched the keyword is deleted Please input keyword Target PLC Setting FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted Input a keyword to be deleted only into keyword FX PLC not compatible with 2nd 2nd keyword is ignored keyword 3 Clear To access an FX PLC where a keyword has been registered keyword protection is cancelled T1 Touching the Clear key pops up a keyboard for keyword input 2 When the correct keyword is
189. cable omission status of the PLC and the transmission 403 Confirm communication pathway O speed of the computer link or modules Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi channel function m Station numbers other than master local station are specified at the Specified station access is out of CC Link connection via G4 406 range O APLC CPU other than QCPU is accessed Confirm station no i Confirm the station number of the project data When monitoring other networks Accessed other network i 407 Reconfigure the Routing Information Setting of GT Designer3 or the O Change network setting Routing parameters of GX Developer Cannot perform operation The operation which could not be performed during RUN of PLC CPU 410 because of PLC run mode was performed O stop the PLC Stop the PLC CPU Memory cassette is The memory cassette installed in the PLC CPU is EPROM or E PROM 411 writeprotected and it is in a protected status Check the memory cassette Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU Cannot read write device The key word is set in PLC CPU 412 protected by keyword O Cancel the key word Remove keyword AEOS ASCII code is selected in Ethernet operations of the PLC side setting 420 E71 specification is ASCII O Select Binary code 421 E71 is set as read only The Et
190. card is insufficient Insufficient memory media Confirm the available memory of the SD card 330 capacity The available memory can be confirmed by system information screen x Confirm M card capacity which is described in GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals The SD card is not installed the drive access switch is OFF in drive Memory card not installed or e 331 Install the SD card in the specified drive x MCARD switched OFF Turn ON the access switch SD is not formatted or formatted incorrectly 332 Memory media is not formatted x Format the SD card 333 Unable to overwrite Memory SD card is write protected T card is write protected Cancel the write protection of SD card 334 Memory media error SD card is faulty Replace memory media Replace the SD card Either of the following folder or file with the name same as the file to be created exists in the storage destination SD card or USB memory 337 File output failed Folder storing data x Confirm output file path Write protect file Delete the above folder or file or change the name of the file to be created Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on 340 Printer error or power failure 1 Confirm the printer x 2 Turn on the power supply of the printer Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on 341 Printer error 1 Confirm the printer x 2 Turn on the
191. cation of comment parts number the data operation Cannot display or input operation 316 value result exceeded the range in which device type can be expressed M Review the data operational expression in order not exceeding the range Review expression in which the device type can be expressed Data of an object to which Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set are collected too frequently or the number of objects has Too high frequency of data exceeded the number of objects collectable simultaneously 317 collection Set a longer cycle for trigger occurrence to each object x Review conditions Make the settings so that 257 or more display triggers of objects to which Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set do not occur simultaneously 320 Specified object does not existor The part file does not exist out of range Create the part file and download to GOT The monitored device No is out of the permissible area of the targeted 322 Dedicated device is out of range PLC CPU Confirm device range Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the monitored PLC CPU and parameter settings 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 13 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION APPENDICES Error Channel No Error message Action code storage Available memory of the SD
192. cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit a P Ed Zo a5 zo 2 TROUBLESHOOTING STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction APPENDICES DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life However the battery liquid crystal display screen and backlight have each life length It is recommended to replace the battery periodically For the replacement
193. ce by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced Replacing consumable parts such as the battery backlight and fuses Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued ON ou A 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted
194. ching the OK button Touching x button returns the screen to the backup restoration setting screen FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 4 When the trigger type is set to Time touching a Trigger settings time setting item for Detail switches the screen to the Target data SYS2BKUP trigger time setting screen Specify the day and time O m to make backup copies In the screen specify the days and time that the Day GOT executes the backup 2 2 Day Select days that the GOT executes the backup m 9 lt miExecute Wiliot execute by touching displayed items S m Multiple days can be selected O26 Time 0 1 0 1 Set the time that the GOT executes the backup OK by touching the displayed item Precautions for setting CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN When the trigger type is set to Rise set the trigger device with GT Designer3 in advance Failure to do so disables the backup setting with Rise set COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 21 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs E Setting function for Behavior of duplicate IPs The GOT operation can be set when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards Maintain a network connection rec The GOT operation can be set when a device
195. curs execute the touch panel calibration When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs other object may be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION e When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations For details on models subject to restrictions refer to the User s Manual for the GOT you are using Before transporting the GOT turn the GOT power on and check that the battery voltage status is normal on the Time setting amp display screen utilities screen In addition confirm that the adequate battery life remains on the rating plate Transporting the GOT with the low battery voltage or the battery the reached battery life may unstabilize the backup data unstable during transportation Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the User s Manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Mitsubishi GOT Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use
196. d must be installed in a conductive control panel It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT on the control panel 1 Control panel a The control panel must be conductive b When fixing a top or bottom plate of the control panel with bolts do not coat the plate and bolt surfaces so that they will come into contact And connect the door and box using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency c When using an inner plate to ensure electric conductivity with the control panel do not coat the fixing bolt area of the inner plate and control panel to ensure conductivity in the largest area as possible d Ground the control panel using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency e Holes made in the control cabinet must be 10 cm 3 94inch diameter or less If the holes are 10cm 3 94inch or larger radio frequency noise may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit reduce the clearance as much as practicable The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint surface 2 Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below Provide a grounding point near the GOT Short circuit the FG terminals of the GOT FG fram
197. d out for files The USB drive only stores log files cannot be displayed For details of Advanced Alarm refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions E 9o Function Description Reference EGE Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 12 13 13 9 SE 2 G1A CSV conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to CSV file 13 14 8 2 TXT conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to TXT file 13 14 Delete File is deleted 13 15 e o Copy File is copied 13 16 E Lu 228 E Display operation of Alarm information xor 7 ig Doo Main menu Program data control s 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu contro ems g Comunication setting 8 Egi cor setup i d a E gm e Time setting amp display Tam Project 2 Ca Prosran data gontro He Hard 2 2 ES ERI Debug amp self ci danced Rect E 2 Touch Iy easing Alarm information H Program data control 8 E ose Alarm information Alarm information Select drive A Built in SD card lt amp a z Ed ns 9 me a oS Q e 5 a 2 Ed gt Sor m 5 Oo aye 2 C Flash Memory Select a drive and operate D Internal SRAM alarm log files GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECT
198. d trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOTicooo GT14 User s Manual MODEL GT14 U E ME 09R823 JY997D44801K MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Effective April 2015 Specifications are subject to change without notice
199. d with the GOT 100 to 299 Third party PLC i Deal with errors according to the error messages Temperature controller OMRON temperature controller only 300 to 399 Error code of the GOT main unit function GOT 5 400 to 499 Error code d the aod GS262 4 communication function gt 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm 500 to 699 Error code of the GOT main unit function Network 800 to 999 Error code of network GS264 CPU 1000 to 10000 Error code of CPU User s manual of the QCPU and QnACPU connected with Value of SDO for QCPU QnACPU GOT pc 10001 to 10999 a User s manual of the Motion controller connected with GOT CNC C70 11000 to 11999 Error code of CNC Q173NCCPU GS263 User s manual of the CNC C70 connected with GOT Robot E of Robot controll BL 12000 to 12999 User s manual of the Robot controller connected with GOT Servo 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier User s manual of the servo amplifier connected with GOT amplifier 18 12 1 For details of GOT special registers GS262 to 264 refer to the following manual 37 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 assigned error code for FXCPU is 100 to 109 which displays the status of M8060 to M8069 Example When the error code 100 error occurs correct the error according to the M8060 description error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code Hexadecimal displayed on the servo ampl
200. duct at least 100mm away from each other If that is not possible the use of a metal separator inside the duct can reduce noise interference Power line 100mm or more Nog Signal line Power line Signal line Wiring duct Separator 7 WIRING 7 5 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel UL cUL SYSTEM STANDARDS AND OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment If communication errors happen in synch with the on off signals from certain control equipment referred to as load hereafter such as no fuse breakers electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and induction motors surge noise interference is suspected If this problem happens keep the ground cable and communication cable away from the load If that is not possible an installation of a surge killer will help reduce noise interference Place the surge killer as close to the load as possible Remedy for AC inductive load Keep the ground cable and communication cable away from each other L Load AC Place the surge killer near the load Output equipment such as PLC output unit Remedy for DC inductive load Keep the ground cable and communication cable away from each other L Load DC Place the surge killer near the load Output equipment such as PLC output unit 7 6 7 WIRING
201. e reserved area Record whose value is not selected and cannot be changed 3 Record Comment Record Comment is displayed File Name Path and name of recipe file are displayed 4 Setting No Recipe No is displayed Name Recipe name is displayed 5 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Advanced recipe information operation 1 Display operation of Advanced Recipe information 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 1 Touching a drive of Select drive displays the information of the touched drive Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder Touching a folder name of displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy Touching al w button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching 4 button scrolls up down the Screen by one screen Touching a file name selects the file For operation of operating switches refer to the following G1P CSV G1P This section 2 CSV TXT 1 L gt This section 3 Delete iiie pede gt This section 4 57 This section 5 L gt This section 6 gt This section 7 Create Folder
202. e USB interface for data transfer data storage host Preventive hole from removing for the USB cable Hole fixed with banding band or others as a prevention from removing for the USB cable 5 Rating plate nameplate The model name current consumption product number H W version and BootOS version are described 6 SD card interface Interface for installing the SD card to the GOT 7 SD card access LED Lit SD card being accessed Not lit SD card is not accessed Prohibits accessing the SD card removing the card from the GOT 8 SD card access switch ON SD card being accessed SD card removal prohibited OFF SD card not accessed SD card removal possible GT11 50BAT battery for storing clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value advanced 9 patay alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area 10 Battery cover Opens closes when the battery is replaced or the terminating resistor is selected 11 Power terminal Power terminal and FG terminal for power supply 24VDC to GOT and grounding 12 Power terminal cover Opens closes when the power terminal is connected color transparent 13 Reset switch Switch for resetting the hardware Use an isolated rod to operate Terminating resistor selector 14 14 switch For switching the RS 422 485 communication interface terminating resistor Ethernet communication status SD RD Turns on in green duri
203. e action setting value advanced alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area backups For the battery directive in EU member states refer to the following CLF 17 4 mHandling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States Battery life and replacement time 1 Battery life reference Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Battery replacement time reference 4 to 5 years The battery is susceptible to natural discharge Order one when necessary 2 Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility For details of battery status display refer to the following 11 1 Display Setting 8 4 8 OPTION 8 3 Battery 8 3 3 Battery replacement procedure Replace battery periodically at intervals of 4 to 5 years as reference h Connector Turn the GOT power off Open the battery cover of the GOT Remove the old battery from the GOT Disconnect the old battery connector and insert the new battery connector within 30s Install a new battery to the GOT and close the battery cover Turn the GOT power on Check if the battery condition is normal with the utility For details of battery status display refer to the following LF 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 8 OPTION 8 5 8 3 Battery OPTION 8 4 Protective Sheet The protective sheet is used to protect the operation surface from damage
204. e advanced recipe setting to be used for new file After selecting touch the Next button As the input key window is displayed input the file name for new file By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button 13 2 Various Data Control 13 45 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 46 Target file A ARPOO001 G1P Do you want to Overwrite the fi le Process completed When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the creation Touching the OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels creating When creating is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 10 Record load operation Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller 1 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to which you want to load the device value File Name Setting No 2 Name product Process 1 setting Process 2 setting Process 3 setting Co ro 3 Touching the Load record GOT gt PLC button displays
205. e ee fee eu egt ed ei 18 11 18 2 2 List of error message system alarm ssssssssssseeeenmm eee 18 13 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External ener em rre nn nnn n nn nennen nennen nennen App 1 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function eem nennen enne App 7 Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions 2ccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeteeeecaeaaecaeceeeeeeeeeeeesecsencaaeeeeeeeeeeeeetenees App 9 Appendix 3 1 Relevant App 9 Appendix 3 2 Transportation App 9 INDEX REVISIONS MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to this product Refer to each manual for any purpose Manual Name Packaging Manual Number Model code GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 S ored in CD ROM SH 080866ENG 1D7MB9 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 1 2 2 2 S ored in CD ROM SH 080867ENG 1D7MC1 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 S ored in CD ROM SH 080868ENG 1D7MC2 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 S ored in CD ROM SH 080869ENG
206. e elei tuna nce de IR tei eda x dd du anna orna 13 1 13 1 1 Data type and storage location sssssssseeenm emm ennemis 13 1 13 1 2 OS version confirmation raisini bete netta 13 3 13 1 3 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading 13 4 19 T4E Displ y file or optet te Eb coge dee toe oe tice Pe eurer pt ve emi EE nie 13 4 13 2 Various Data e P RR PR BUD eda 13 5 19 2 1 QS information peers Lee redeo eee el de ede ered 13 5 19 22 Alarm information eet ette tee De tbe e Pt p eite hebetes 13 11 19 2 3 ProjectinfOrmatiori i eret t cete td mtr pep c e OR ERR 13 17 13 2 4 copy 13 27 13 2 5 Advanced recipe information 13 33 13 2 6 Logging A 13 53 13 227 Memory format iet ete t Eg tee RE en RR ed Re esee s 13 63 13 2 8 Memory information dieere REDE 13 65 13 2 9 USB device status display n E de n nna 13 66 13 2310 SRAM Control rp e HER AREE D tend 13 68 13 2 11 GOT data package acquisition
207. e executing Processing message appears on the screen When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown at left appears without starting the conversion Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the conversion 6 The message of completion is displayed in dialog Process completed box when conversion is completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 38 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 CSV TXT G1P conversion operation CSV file or Unicode text file is converted to an advanced recipe file G1P file Please select dest ination File conversion from TXT to 61 Source file Convert to ARPOO01 G1P Do you want to convert the file This folder already contains the file ARPOOQ01 G1P Do you want to replace the existing file Modified 11 05 18 15 17 with this one Modified 11 05 18 15 17 s To select the file touch the check box of CSV file or Unicode text file to be converted to a G1P file 2 Selectthe target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown at
208. e ground and ground them with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30cm 11 81in or shorter The FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the PC system to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency 3 Shock protection In order to prevent those who are unfamiliar with power facility e g an operator from getting a shock make sure to take the following measures on the control panel a Store the GOT within the control panel locked and allow only those who are familiar with power facility to unlock the panel b Build the structure in order that the power supply will be shut off when the control panel is opened 4 Dustproof and waterproof features The control panel also provides protection from dust water and other substances Insufficient ingression protection may lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in the GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or better Pollution level An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level2 An environment where conductive dust does not
209. e password to be changed on the Main Menu screen for the utility 2 Touch Password change in the operator setting menu and then the Password change dialog box is perator management displayed Password change Is Function setting perator setting menu 3 Input the current password on the Password change dialog box Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter ibn i ZIXICIVIBIN M Enter When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 Input a new password Password change Input a new password 5 After inputting a new password input the new password again New password 6 When the new password is correctly input the dialog The password change is completed box shown left is displayed and the password is changed 13 86 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Function setting z 1 Function setting function 5 i p z The functions for the operator information can be set gt The following items can be set E E Lr Items Description Reference 2 The time from when the last time the GOT is operated until when you automatically log out of the GOT can be Automatic logout time set 13 88 1 to 60 minutes 0 is invalid E 9 Auth method The authentication method can Hp Switched Operator
210. e select a destination and push Copy button Select Drive Built in SD card COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 73 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 12 Operator information management E Operator management 1 Operator management function The function enables displaying a list of the operator information and adding changing or deleting the operator information to be used A password for operator authentication can be changed when the password is out of date Functions for the operator authentication automatic logout time authentication method password expiration date etc can be set For details of operator authentication functions refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Function Description Reference Operator management Enables adding editing deleting importing and exporting the operator information 13 74 13 77 Add operation Adds operator information to the GOT 13 78 Edit operation Edits the operator information stored in the GOT 13 80 Delete operation Deletes the operator information stored in the GOT 13 81 Undo Restores the current operator information to the previous saved one 13 82 Import operation Imports the operator information that is already exported to a SD card to the GOT 13 83 Export operation Exports the operator information stored in the GOT
211. e used Any device which utilizes a data communication function is susceptible to the wider effects of local EMC noise Therefore when installing any communication cables care should always be taken with the routing and location of z those cables The GOT identified on the previous page are compliant with the EMC requirement when the following communication cables used E 2 1 Panel mounted USB port extension GT14 C10EXUSB 4S 2 Direct connection cable Existing Cables User Made Cables z GT01 C30R2 6P GT01 C30R4 25P gt 8 GT01 C100R4 25P GT01 C200R4 25P ea GT01 C300R4 25P GT01 C10R4 8P The cable need to be independently tested by the user to demonstrate EMC A GT01 C30R4 8P GT01 C100R4 8P compatibility when they are used with the GOT the PLC of MELSEC Q series GT01 C200R4 8P GT01 C300R4 8P MELSEC L series MELSEC QnA MELSEC A series and MELSEC FX series GTO01 C30R2 9S GT01 C30R2 25P WSO0 C20R2 o 6 3 Ethernet connection cable Shielded twisted pair cable STP 2 4 PLC manufactured by other company microcomputer temperature controller inverter servo amplifier CNC MODBUS R RTU MODBUS R TCP connection 2 Produce the cable RS 232 cable RS 422 485 cable for connecting the GOT to a controller with reference to the following manual 5 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used m 2 2 5 2 3 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the Directive Compliant Product
212. eaction speed Standard 0 m Touclagane calibration ett ing i el TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY GOT setup ps Operation Touch panel calibration Touch panel calibration COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL Touch panel calibration on the rk to calibrate the touch panel Note 1 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 13 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation E Touch panel calibration operation Touch the point displayed on the screen with the finger one by one to make the setting 1 Touch the center of the displayed on the upper left precisely Touch panel calibration mark to calibrate the touch panel eing s aborted left for 10 2 Touch the X point displayed on the upper right Touch panel calibration X mark to calibrate the touch par ration can be p 4 p 3 Touch the X point displayed on the lower left 4 Touch the X point displayed on the lower right 5 Touching the lt button displayed on the upper right returns the screen to the previous screen When the precise touch could not be made touch the Readjustment button to make the setting from 7 again ton ton 11 14 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET U
213. ect information Screen Select drive 5 Ifthe copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Please select TES RENT a_destination 6 Touching Exec button displays the dialog box Copy file name shown left PROJECT 1 Copy destination A PROJECT2 Copy OK Cance 13 20 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control File is already exist Overwrite now Copy is completed 4 Property display operation Touch OK button If there is no file of the same name in the copy destination folder starts to copy When there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the dialog mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder Touching OK button starts copy Touching Cancel button cancels the copy When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog Displays the property of the project data in the selected folder Property Date 0 13 11 Author B 1 Title Screen B 15 Operation B 16 Display Screen perat ion Drawing S
214. ecution switch of functions download upload etc which can be carried out in Project information 9 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following Ss 13 1 4 Display file 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Operation of project information 1 Display operation of Project information Project information 61 KW Size Date Time JECT 1 29K 06 16 11 16 25 2 Deletion operation Deletes selected files Delete project data PROJECT 1 Do you want to delete Delete is completed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touching a drive in Select drive displays the project data in the drive Touching project data selects and inverts it For operation of delete copy property data check download upload refer to the following 57 This section 2 2 2 gt This section 3 This section 4 Data check 57 This section 5 Download setup L gt This section 6 This section 7 Touching x button closes the screen Touch and select the file to delete Touching De
215. ed pressing OK button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 89 13 2 Various Data Control COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL E Display example of GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition GOT s OS project data are copied to the SD card This SD card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button Select Drive A Built in SD card Copy Number Description Displays the drive where OS and data can be copied The A Built in SD card is not displayed when SD card is not installed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed Select drive 1 2 Touching the button starts copying E GOT data package acquisition operation 4 Display operation of GOT data package acquisition The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the SD card or USB memory This item explains using the A drive GOT data package acquisition 1 Touching the drive name below Select Drive inverts GOT s OS project data are copied to the touched drive name the SD card This SD card can be use for installation when the GOT is Touching the Copy button starts copying turned on Please select a destination and push button Select Drive
216. emperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 i 2 amp E Ed 0 2 WIRING OPTION 6 INSTALLATION 6 3 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 5 Installation Procedure The GOT is designed to be embedded into a panel Mount the GOT by following the procedure below For the panel cutting dimension refer to 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimension Also be sure that the thickness of the mounting panel face is 2 to 4mm 1 Installing the packing Install packing to the packing installation groove on the back panel of the GOT While referring to the cross sectional view of the packing shown left push the thinner side into the packing groove Left drawing is the example of lateral format Packing Magnified illustration Packing installation groove Packing cross sectional view Y Inserting direction e Inserting into the panel face Insert the GOT from the front side of the panel Mounting hole Enlarged view 3 Fixing the GOT Engage the hook of the mounting fixture accessory to the unit fixing hole of the GOT and fix them by tightening the mounting screws in the torque range of 0 3 to 0 5N m Mounting bracket Mounting screw 4 A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment Remove the film when the installation is completed 6 4 6 INSTALLATION 6 5 Installation Procedure BRA m Cautions on insta
217. entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 7 The size of dri 7 S lee Nes Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 9 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files GO 1 Display of creation date and time The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the alarm information display screen If close the screen currently displayed moving the screen to the folder of the upper hierarchy etc and display the screen again the updated contents are displayed 2 Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 13 1 4 Display file 13 12 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Alarm information operation 1 Display operation of Alarm information Alarm information screen Alarm information Select drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM v Alarm information Storage file folder display screen on Size Date Time 13K 07 13 11 14 18 R 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touching a drive of Select drive displays the information of the touched drive Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder Touching a folder of displays the information of the folder of the one
218. equired E Memory check i Gating A a fani HINT Refers to information useful for operation When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the the location of related content lt 8 1 SD Card 8 2 USB Memory When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arisen Replace the SD card or USB memory or built in flash memory C drive For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Built in SD card A drive memory check install the SD card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory For the USB drive E drive memory check install the USB memory before carrying out the check operations ndicates the operation procedure ts rive in the rive screen in S Men e a A Perform procedures in numerical order N l Indicates the setting items displayed 2 Internal SRAM on the software and GOT screen TER Refers to a button displayed on the computer screen or the GOT screen or a key of the computer keyboard Touching Check button displays the dialog box on Internal Flush menory area the left write read check Selecting OK button disp
219. er 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the Operator information management screen in displayed For operating operation switches refer to the following L gt This section 4 a Edit gt This section 4 b Delete ote ttes L gt This section 4 c OT ae ee lt gt This section 4 d uei lt This section 4 e Export L3 This section 4 f After all settings are completed touch the Save button and then the settings are saved Touch the Dx button without touching the Save button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 13 2 Various Data Control 13 77 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL Add operation Add operator information to the GOT Operator information management Administrator 001 1001 10 2012 07 22 0 002 1002 12 2012 07 22 OPOOQ3 1003 12 2012 07 22 perator information edit OperatorName 1 Operator ID Level Password L 1 Make a permanent password Use ext auth ID __ __ _ Operator name input 0 0008 4j2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 TERR Operator ID input Operator level input La 4j2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 E TE PR
220. er 05 26 00 AL 2 Touch the OK button to cancel installation E Because of version down GOT aborts After canceling installation restart the GOT aor installing 62 TE WS p 2 When BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS stored the SD or USB memory x D 1 Skip the BootOS installation and install standard gee Boot OS has been already installed monitor OS and other OS Exsisting OS Ver 05 27 00 If the standard monitor OS is already stored on the Expected 05 Ver 06 27 00 T the followi is disblaved Exsisting other 05 and Special data and GOT the following message is displayed project data will be deleted 2 Touching the OK button executes installation Do you want to install FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA Touching the Cancel button cancels installation s After executing or canceling installation restart the GOT 8 Em Q 3 When the version is the same or newer regardless of the data stored in the SD card or USB memory ax conditions 1 and 2 above uo 1 The version information and a dialog for selecting 9 85 Boot OS has been already installed whether or not to continue installation are Exsisting OS Ver 05 27 DO AM displayed Expected OS Ver 05 27 00 AM Ez Exs ist ing bas ic 05 and other 05 and 2 Touching the OK button executes installation 58 project data will be deleted Touching the Cancel button cancels ins
221. erating equipment nearby 50mm or more 100mm or more 80mm or more 50mm or more In the absence of radiated noise or heat generating equipment nearby 20mm or more 20mm or more 20mm or more 20mm or more 4 Vertical Format 50 mm 1 97 or more 2 Vertical Format 80 mm 3 14 or more 6 INSTALLATION 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimension Panel thickness 2 to 4mm 0 08 to 0 16inch P lt j 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle When mounting the main unit to a control panel or similar fixture set the GOT display section as shown below E E Horizontal installation When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to 105 degrees GOT back panel GOT B display section Be Control panel etc The GOT will have a longer lifetime if used within the mounting angles shown above 2 Ideally the temperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 C 5 D B Vertical installation When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 50 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to 105 degrees GOT z back panel 5 2 x GOT display section Control panel 2 Qe etc Q The GOT will have a longer lifetime if used within the mounting angles shown above 5 5 a o Ideally the t
222. es against noise There are two kinds of noises Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to the following 3 points INSTALLATION 1 Protecting against noise a Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a highpower drive circuit b Shield the signal lines 2 Reducing generated noise a Usea noise filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit b Attach surge killers to the terminals on the No Fuse Breaker NFB electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and generators to suppress noise interference 2 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lower its impedance c Ground the power system and the control system separately OPTION 7 WIRING 7 1 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 1 Wiring example Connect the power supply to the power terminals on the back panel of the GOT Use 0 75mm or thicker cables to avoid voltage drop and tighten the terminal screw with the specified torque securely Lad SD CARD da INPUT PC and external fc 24 device connection T cables en INPUT pg 24 0 1 H
223. es read write check for the built in flash memory which is completed in around 10 seconds 14 4 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check 1 Password change The password cannot be changed When input password error the cancel dialog box is Internal Flush memory area write read check displayed Touching OK returns to the Memory check screen Internal Flush memory area write read check Executing now Internal Flush memory area write read check Normaly completed 2 When error is found in memory When error is found by memory check the dialog box indicating the area in which the error occurred is ee displayed write read error In case of error contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Touching OK returns to the Memory check screen 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 5 14 2 Self Check 14 2 2 Drawing check Drawing check function The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check color check basic figure display check move check among screens E Display operation of drawing check Main Menu Debug amp self check Self check gt 9 Utility Display Wa jon settin 9 Time setting amp display em Progran data control Self check Display check Drawing check Drenge abort switch continue switch f Notes on drawing check
224. et or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shown in 1 on the or their packaging b Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC 17 6 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display When GOT detects backlight shutoff the POWER LED blinks green orange alternately The brightness of the backlight decreases with the lapse of usage period When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear replace the backlight GT14 requires LED replacement For replacement of the backlight contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 1 Life of backlight ey Z Zo 25 Zo 77 22 The usable duration of backlight can be extended by
225. ey position Touch the time input area d Touching the input area displays a keyboard Input numerical value from the keyboard 4 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button returns the screen to the Operation screen 1 When the utility call key is set to the zero point Even when the utility call key is set to the zero point you can display the main menu using either of the following two operations Pressing the special function switch set on the user created screen Keeping pressing the upper left corner while the Booting message is displayed after powering up gt 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu 2 Precautions on using the advanced alarm popup display When Display Position Switching is set to Switch in the advanced alarm popup display setting set either of the following for the utility call key Setting the position of the utility call key to the upper right or lower left corner Setting Pressing Time of the utility call key to 1 or more seconds When Pressing Time is set to O and the key position is set to the lower left corner the operation is as described below If the positions of the key and the advanced alarm popup display overlap the utility screen appears by switching the display position of the advanced alarm popup display For the advanced alarm popup display refer to the following gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions
226. for Panasonic P LCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Model name caus Contents length GT09 C30R20901 25P 3m For connecting GOT to Panasonic RS422 232C conversion adapter GT09 C30R20902 9P am For connecting to the tool port or RS232C port of Panasonic PLC computer communication unit GT09 C30R20903 9P 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of Panasonic PLC GT09 C30R20904 3C 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of Panasonic PLC Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs Sold separately Product Cable Model name Contents name length GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09 C200R40201 9P 20m GT09 C300R40201 9P 30m RS 422 cable GT09 C30R40202 14P 3m GT09 C100R40202 14P 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09 C200R40202 14P 20m GT09 C300R40202 14P 30m GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m GT09 C30R20202 15P 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m GT09 C30R20204 14P 3m GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 System Equipment Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs Sold separately Cable Contents name length GT09 C30R40301 6T 3m GT09 C100R40301 6T 10m GT09 C200R40301 6T 20m GT09 C300R40301 6T 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOG
227. for a long time an incidental color or partial discoloration is generated on the screen due to 5 heat damage and it may not disappear E g To prevent the heat damage the screen saver function is effective 55 z For details on the screen saver function refer to the following A amp 11 1 Display Setting Just after the GOT is powered off sometimes an image lag or partial discoloration is generated temporary However they are caused by the characteristic of the liquid crystal After powering off they disappear within a few minutes 2 Gradation inversion is a characteristic of liquid crystal display panel Please be forewarned that depending on the displayed color the visualization may be difficult even within the described view angle 3 GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life C 37 11 1 Display Setting 4 touch panel is analog resistive film type If you touch the panel simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the panel in 2 points or more simultaneously Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section An analog resistive film type touch panel does not require adjustment usua
228. g backup data 14 1 4 Memory check Memory check of A drive C drive D drive and E drive 14 2 1 Debug amp self check Drawing check 14 2 2 o F Display check me Self Font check 14 2 3 SES Eo check Touch panel check Touch panel operation check 14 2 4 9 5 check Connected target confirmation self loopback check 14 2 5 S26 Ethernet status check Sends a ping to check the Ethernet connection status 14 2 6 Sis System alarm display Displaying GOT errors and CPU errors resetting GOT errors 14 3 GOT start time Displaying GOT start date and time current time accumulated operating hours 14 4 8 z Clean Clean Displaying the screen for cleaning the display 15 E 1 Do not use this function for other than 5V power supply to the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor a o amp C37 7 11 RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter E 2 5V power supply can be set with the GT 14 hardware version B or later In the hardware version A since 5V power is always 5 supplied this setting operation is invalid 2 5 gt 5 one e HE eZ Sew Cae COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 3 9 2 Utility Function List 9 3 Utility Display To display setting screens for each utility the main menu must be displayed first Main Menu Main
229. gger backup refer to the following manual x gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 zi d 2 E Display operation of Trigger backup setting 1 Touching a setting item for the trigger type changes Trigger backup settings the setting E No Backup Detail 9 25 None Rise Time EU amp Pa i e 8 SEE None GOT does not execute the trigger backup E 8 Qum o 2 Rise The GOT backs up data when the trigger device turns on Do not check changes Time The GOT backs up data at the specified time Check changes file registers 2 Include W Do rot include 2 Touching a setting item for Check changes file 3 register changes the setting 2 2 5 The GOT backs up data regardless that the 4 backup data are changed or not ES m 5 aog When the backup is executed the GOT checks if the backup data or file registers are changed after the previous backup When the data or file registers are changed the GOT backs up the changed data or file registers B When the backup is executed the GOT checks if the backup data are changed after the previous backup When the data are changed the GOT backs up the changed data The GOT does not check if the file registers are changed or not S a 5 a a e 2 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY 3 When the trigger type is changed the setting is defined by tou
230. h button is displayed only for the selectable languages The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For the relation between the selectable languages and the fonts refer to the following gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 2 5 Specifications of Applicable Characters 2 System language switching using the device The system language can be switched using the system language switching device set with GT Designer3 For the setting method of the system language switching device refer to the following gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 3 Language Switching Device Setting GOT Environmental Setting Language Switching 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 3 11 1 Display Setting E Opening screen screen save time Language Japanese Opening screen time sec Screen save time 0 0 None Screen save backlight 26 Battery alarm display Language Japanese Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min 0 None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display 0 Brightness contrast Setting With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK n 2 Touching the setting time numerical displays the keyboard Input numeric with the keyboard Touching OK button defines the setting contents
231. he IP address of the other terminal with the keyboard lt Default 192 168 3 39 gt If touch the Ping transmission button a ping is sent to the IP address entered in IP address of the other station The timeout time is about 5sec When GOT and PLC are in communication The dialog box showing Response received is displayed When a communication error occurs The dialog box showing Timeout occurred is displayed 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 3 System Alarm Display E System alarm function System alarm is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT controller or network System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen For details of system alarm refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals E Display operation of System alarm display Main menu Debug amp self check 9 Utility Display Main Menu System alarm display Debug amp self check System alarm display System alarm disp GOT error Touching Reset resets the 500 Bui lt in battery voltage is low system alarm display in the 11 57 21 GOT error CPU error No Error 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 19 14 3 System Alarm Display Operation of system alarm display 1 System alarm display resetting 1 Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being
232. he advanced recipe setting that uses file Recipe device upload error Loading recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe 590 Recipe device value does not device value is not set x exist Specify the record of which recipe device value is set The advanced recipe setting is not correct Advanced Recipe error Check 591 recie det Confirm the advanced recipe setting of the project data and download it x i p to the GOT again E Logging file error 595 Logging file error a x When collecting data again delete logging files and management files 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 19 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION APPENDICES Error Channel No Error message Action code storage The logging setting specified in the historical trend graph setting does not 596 Logging setting does not exist or exist x setting value error Review the historical trend graph setting and specify a logging setting that exists The error may be caused by a failure in the GOT Please consult your 605 USB device I F error nin x local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative 611 Improper job files The contents for job files are unmatched with the settings for job files Confirm job setting Check if there are mistakes in the settings on the setting screen Insert a SD ca
233. he project data to be displayed can be selected 13 24 9 E Upload Uploads the project data written in the C drive Flash Memory to the A drive Built in SD card E 13 25 H z drive USB drive 26 2 gt E W Setup cancel Cancels the item which is selected for the project data to be displayed 13 26 E E e oo 209 POINT gt 5 ane Notes on operating project data EEG RR ids RN When the OS boot drive is set to A Built in SD card deleting copying downloading setting up and uploading E H H E project data are not available 5 4 E Bey ose E Display operation of Project information Main Menu Program Data control gt 9 3 Utility Display Conmunication setting tm OS information GOT setup ita Alarm informat lon Time setting amp display lt amp a z Ed ns 9 ne E 58 Q e 5 a 2 Ed gt Sor m DLO mua Program data ont 1 ER Debug amp self cl a Advanced Tm Logging informati Touch Project information Program data control Project information Project information GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK Select drive A Built in SD card x 5 Ow apo or C Flash Memory Select a drive and 26 operate project data 5 D Internal SRAM files d COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 17 13 2 Va
234. hernet module on the PLC side is set in read only Clear setting Set the Ethernet module on the PLC side to write enabled TM PLC CPU error Communication between PLC CPU and the PLC side Not communicating between Ethernet module impossible 422 CPU and E71 Confirm CPU ns Confirm whether there is error in PLC CPU by GX Developer etc Confirm buffer memory 18 16 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm Error code 423 Error message Insufficient network table information Add station no Action The station number set in the project data and the station number set in the switching station No device do not exist in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 Add the station number set in the project data to the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 When using the station No switching function check the data of the Switching station No device When the station number specified in the switching station No device is not set in the Ethernet setting add the station number to the Ethernet setting When the station number does not exist in the system change the data of the switching station No device Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer Channel No storage 424 Same sta on GOT amp project data Review communication parameter The station number set in the GOT s
235. ialog box is displayed Procese completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 61 13 2 Various Data Control E Precautions 13 62 1 When creating folder file a Number of characters set for folder or file name when creating folder file GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed Example CSV file Path in SD card or USB memory i 2 characters 1 character Extension 4 characters Drive name 1 character lt 78 characters If folder is assigned the hierarchy The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character b c Character strings that cannot be set to folder file The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 AUX CON NUL PRN CLOCK In addition the folder file name shown below cannot be used The folder name which begins with G1 Folder name and file name which begin with period Folder name and file name which finish with period Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods
236. iation of the SWLIDNC GTWKS3 E and SWLIDNC GTWK3 EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SWLIDNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works Abbreviation of SWLIDNC GXW2 E and SWEIDNC GXW2 EA type programmable controller engineering software GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function GX Simulator Abbreviation of SWLID5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer Abbreviation of SWLID5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SWLIDNN VIEWER E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SWLID5C FBDQ E type FB
237. icating with PC drawing software bar code reader RFID controller or controller RS 422 485 For communicating with controller USB unis For communicating with PC drawing software Ethernet For communicating with PC drawing software or controller 10 2 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 Communication setting 3 Channel number specification menu BOX Set channel No to use with standard interface Refer to this section 4 for driver that be assigned to each channel 0 Set when the communication interface is not used 1 2 Set when connecting to a controller gt 8 Set when connecting with a bar code reader or RFID 9 Set when connecting with PC drawing software 0 Set when using the function that uses the gateway function when connection types except the Ethernet connection is used for connecting to controllers Ethernet download function Fixed to 9 for the USB interface 1 Cannot be assigned with Ethernet I F Assignment 4 Driver display BOX The name of communication driver assigned to the channels or the driver set with the Communication Setting of drawing software is displayed For details of drivers to be displayed refer to the following manual 9o z Z SES n lt ou 225 mE Su 560 ozo GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 8 2 Displays None in the driver display BOX
238. id devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available or contact your local distributor 2 o Be lt 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 9 i When USB memory is accurately inserted to the USB interface the GOT automatically recognizes it 2 For removing methods of the USB memory refer to the following gt 13 2 9 USB device status display gt Ed z Yn 2 amp STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION ee WIRING 8 OPTION 8 3 8 2 USB Memory 8 3 Battery The battery backs up clock data and data stored in the built in RAM D drive including alarm history recipe data time action setting value advanced alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area A battery is installed to GT14 when GT14 is shipped from the factory 8 3 1 Applicable battery The following battery is applicable for GT14 Model name Description Battery for clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value advanced alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area backups 8 3 2 Battery specifications The following describes the battery specifications Item Specifications Model name GT11 50BAT Type Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 Application For clock data alarm history recipe data tim
239. ifier to the decimal number and adding 20000 to it When referring to the manual of servo amplifier by the error code displayed as a GOT system alarm subtract 20000 from the GOT error code and change its lower three digits to the hexadecimal number Example When GOT system alarm is 20144 the error code of servo amplifier becomes 90H 4 Channel No will not be stored depending on the error code For channel No storage availability for each error code refer to the following 57 18 2 2 List of error message system alarm 5 An alarmed drive cannot be confirmed in the system alarm regarding file access however it can be specified by confirming the file access error signal b7 to 10 of system signal 2 2 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm 18 2 2 List of error message system alarm The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below Error Channel No Error message Action code storage Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen 303 Set monitor points too large For the number of maximum objects for 1 screen refer to the following Decrease setting points gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals The number of objects using Sampling Cycle during ON Cycle during Set trigger points too large 304 OFF exceeds 100 x Decrease setting points Decrease the number of objects 306 No project data The project da
240. in case of the following E ee The communication driver is not installed gt 13 2 1 OS information 225 In channel number specification menu BOX 0 is set a2 o When the channel number is set to 9 to RS 232 interface the communication driver Host PC or Host aso model can be selected When the channel number is set to 9 to USB interface the communication driver Host PC is automatically assigned T ES aa 5 Assign Ethernet I F 22 The communication settings for the Ethernet connection can be made Only Ethernet interface built in model can display this button 565 Ethernet I F Assignment assign up to two channels interface 13 5 10 1 4 Bl Assign Ethernet I F operation 6 5V power supply Set the 5V power supply when using the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor 77 10 1 4 5V power supply operation Precautions for communications between GOT and controller FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 1 Installing communication driver and downloading Communication Setting The following below is required for the communication interface to communicate with the controller 1 Installing communication drivers Up to 4 communication drivers 2 Assigning the channel number and communication driver for the communication interface 3 Downloading the contents project data assigned in 2 Perform1 2 3 by drawing software GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK
241. ing message display When limiting the display and operation of the utility When limiting the display and operating users set a password to the GOT using the GT Designer3 If a user tries to display the main menu of the utility the password input screen is displayed For details on setting passwords refer to the following lt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 7 9 3 Utility Display 2 z 5 Le gt E 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration The basic configuration of the screen is as follows Title display Close Return button Scroll key Screen 1 Title display The screen title name is displayed in title display part peration Buzzer volume Window move buzzer Security setting Title display Utility call key Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard x 0 Menu call key Pressing time Title display Please select keys 2 Close Return button When a middle screen of the layers is displayed if the x Close return button in the right corner of screen is touched returns to the previous screen If this button is touched when directly displayed from monitor screen the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen 3 Scroll button For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page there is a right or down scroll button on the screen A v 45
242. ing the instruction displayed 5 After touching the screen the screen returns to the Main Menu pag The following screen is displayed gt 22 gu Ro ZZ 56 35 E On COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 15 1 15 2 9 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS 2 o Lr BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR 4 2 OS E 2 For executing the GOT utility install the BootOS and standard monitor OS on the C drive built in flash memory of the E e GOT or set the OS boot drive to A Standard SD card and insert the SD card with OS files into the GOT ES BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when upgrading of it is Eu unnecessary 2225 This chapter explains the installation using GOT FEE ozo GT Designer3 SD card gt GOT USB memory BootOS or Write standard monitor OS 7 OS file gw installation When GOT is remote installed Z N 5s easily using the CF card E L2 USB memory Install the SD LOL SD card USB 1 GOT z iA GT Designer3 amc Da 209 eec The GOT can starts without an 771 OS installed e e Writ Install the SD pr OS fle SD card e in GOT 2 5 Set the OS boot Eg drive to A St
243. ion The screen display is not updated and any The screen freezes t operation is not allowed 18 2 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet Proceed to 1 e Cause status Action e Buzzer sound O Does not sound Buzzer sound Continues to beep randomly Proceed to 2 Status of the GOT when it Example The rhythm as three beeps one beep and then two beeps is repeated Continues to beep in a particular pattern freezes The read device of the system information may have turned ON when the device was set turning ON the Buzzer output signal Beeps continuously Check the setting of the read device When the Buzzer output signal has no error proceed to 2 Status of the GOT when it freezes Status of the GOT when it freezes screen operation stopped 2 Phenomenon Cause status a Switching to the utility Action Error code system alarm Enabled Example 460 Communication unit error When the system alarm display function can be used take the action for the error code system alarm displayed If the action cannot be taken proceed to 2 b The system alarm display function cannot be O Disabled used Proceed to 2 c b Executing of I O check from the GOT utility Display details Example A message indicating the cause may be a connection error was displayed LI
244. ion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty six 36 months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty two 42 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified If requested by the customer Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer s expense The primary failure diagnosis will however be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 3 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligen
245. ion due to the damage of the GOT or the mounting fixtures Also distortion of the GOT or the panel may disable waterproof or oil proof effect Precautions for protective cover for oil The protective cover for oil is a consumable product Check the cover for scratch damage or dirt at regular intervals and replace with new one if necessary Do not push the protective cover for oil with pointed tools including mechanical pencils and screwdrivers Doing so causes scratches and damages of the cover Do not clean the protective cover for oil with bleaches thinners organic solvents corrosive chemicals and others Doing so causes changes in shape and color of the cover When the protective cover for oil is attached to the GOT do not stretch and bend the cover too much Doing so may cause a separation between the sheet and rubber Do not place or use the protective cover for oil in direct sunshine When the protective cover for oil gets dusts wipe the dusts off with a damp cloth Do not do a frequent detaching the protective cover for oil It causes deterioration in the oil performance and the medicine performance It is not the one to guarantee all customer s environments Moreover it is not likely to be able to use it in the environment to which oil splashes for a long time and the environment with which Oilmist is filled 8 OPTION 8 5 Protective Cover for Oil 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover The USB environmen
246. ion level For the devices which can perform the online operation of FX PLC 3 levels of protection can be set When the monitoring or setting change by online devices is needed set the keyword taking the following into consideration a When only keyword is registered Protection level is selected by the head character of keyword All operation prohibition Set the keyword starting with one of A D to F or 0 to 9 Read incorrect write protection Set the keyword starting with B Erroneous write prohibition Set the keyword starting with C b When keyword and 2nd keyword are registered Protection level is selected by Registration conclition Applicability of monitoring for each keyword protection level The applicability of monitoring for each protection level is as follows When k d and 2nd k d When only keyword is registered nu ar qu M an registered Keyword Read unregistered Item Erroneous Alloperation Incorrect ne cles Read Write Write p prohibition write n prohibition Protect cancelled prohibition protection Device monitoring x O O O T C setting values file register x x x Device from D1000 change Other than the above 1 When the T C setting values are specified indirectly changing devices is available Difference between All Protect and All operation prohibition When Protect is selected
247. ion screen Storage file folder display screen gt Advanced Recipe Information idvanced Recipe Information 5 see Se 528 5 zEz zu A16KB 3861584KB d 828 BIP CSV Bede Create GIP TXT Del Rename Folder Execute 9 E ag Zi Number Item Description RS g lu 0 1 Select drive The target drive can be selected Even if SD card is not installed this message appears a aog 2 Kind Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder hod In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name 8 For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed e 3 Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc 28 Nn L77 13 2 5 WAdvanced recipe information operation 7 Rename operation E 9 After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation Ez z E 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed E E H 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 7 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 8 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files lt amp a z Ed ns O ne 58 oO Q 5 a z Ed 55 Sor m DLO mua 1
248. ion1 Screen Design Manual Functions 5 Function Description Reference T 2 Displaying file folder data The file folder type name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 28 13 29 E 20 Delete File is deleted 13 30 E File is copied 13 31 SEE Rename Renames file 13 32 SES 2 E Display operation of Hardcopy information Main menu Program data control gt 9 3 Utility Display n n settin 0 info BOT setup Alarm informat ion Time setting amp display Tail Project informa Progran data control dg Hard copy i OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP Touch Program data control Hard copy information Hard copy Information Select drive A Built in SD card CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY C Flash Memory Select a drive and operate hard copy D Internal SRAM data files lt amp a z Ed ns O E Gs Q e 5 a 2 Ed gt Sor m DLO mua LOO GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 27 13 2 Various Data Control Display example of Hardcopy information Hard copy information elect drive A Built in SD card Ds Internal SRAM C Flash Memo
249. is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect Flickers and partial discoloration may be generated on the liquid crystal display panel due to the display contents or the contrast adjustment However please note that these phenomena appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect There is a difference in the display brightness and the color tones between liquid crystal display panels When using multiple gt liquid crystal display panels please note that there is an individual difference between them Li A crosstalk shadow as an extension of the display may appear on the liquid crystal display panel Please note that it appears due to its characteristic When the display section is seen from the outside of the display angle the display color seems like it has changed Please note that it appears due to its characteristic Especially the response time of a STN liquid crystal display is slower in the lower temperature due to its characteristic Please use the display after checking the response time z Please note that the response time brightness and color of the liquid crystal display panel may vary depending on the usage environmental temperature z When the same screen is displayed
250. itor OS communication driver etc or download project data as required 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed z When the CoreOS cannot be installed confirm the following item If the CoreOS cannot be installed even after checking the following item the error be caused by a hardware failure 2 Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative E Error Action 1 Check whether the SD card access switch of the GOT is on If the switch is off switch it on The CoreOS installation is not executed even when installing the SD Sm SIS OTE on 2 2 The writing from the GT Designer3 to the SD card may have been E card in the GOT 9o completed normally z Z Execute the writing from the GT Designer3 to the SD card again 0 The GOT main unit is broken 5 GOT error Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center BES Contact your local sales office 2 9 representative SD card error The SD card is defective Check whether the SD card can be used 1 Format the SD card and re execute 8 Installation will be cancelled 2 Replace the SD card The message is digblaved GOT type and OS version do not match The GOT type selected at Core OS write of the GT Designers is not correct 9 Z a e Inst
251. l button displays the screen mentioned left Confirm the deletion targeted file is specified correctly Touching OK button deletes the file Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion When the deletion completes the dialog box shown left is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 2 Various Data Control 13 19 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 3 Copy operation Uploads the project data written in the C drive Flash Memory to the A drive Built in SD card E drive USB drive Copying to another directory in the same drive Copying between A drive and E drive Copy to from C drive or copy to C drive D drive is disabled This item explains using the A drive 1 Install SD card in the PC in which create a folder for the copy destination Set the same character with System Setting of System Environment of GT Designers for the folder name L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Install the SD card mentioned above to GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following 57 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 3 Open Project Information screen to select the file to Dialog for selecting a copy destination folder 4 Touching Copy button displays the message i i Please select destination the left bottom of the Proj
252. lay Nain Men Nain Menu 2 9 2 z o 2 oa 25 lt 0 l a 209 Bi SHORT Window mo amp x A Secur i Utility Key sen N Touch GOT setup Operation 6 msr Security setting TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Security level change Security level change Please input password Security level change FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Input the password of the security level which is set in Drawing software GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 9 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation E Security level change operation 1 Password input operation 1 By touching 0 to 9 A to F key the password of Security level change T the changed security level is input Please input password 2 When correcting the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character and input the password again 3 After inputting password touch the Enter key When the password matches a message notifying successful change of the security level is displayed When the password does not match
253. lays the numeric keyboard window R Execute now Selecting Cancel button returns to the initial menu OK 4 Touch to input password 5 9 2 0 and touch Enter key Touching Enter key executes read write check for the built in flash memory which is completed in Ix Please input password around 10 seconds 1 8 8 4 8 tsele O AG Del 14 4 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check Since the above page was created for explanation purpose it differs from the actual page 1 OVERVIEW ll About GOT A GOT is installed on the panel surface of a control panel or operating panel and connects to the PLC within the control panel The GOT carries PLC out switch operation lamp display data display message display etc Connector for For the display screen two kinds of screens are available user screen program and utility screen 1 User Screen The user screen is a screen drawn by drawing software The objects Touch switch Lamp display Comment display and Numeric display can be arbitrarily arranged on the display Moreover multiple screens created within drawing software can be individually selected or overlapped for the display GOT For details refer to the following 3 GT Designer3 Versio
254. left appears without starting the conversion Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the conversion The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 39 13 2 Various Data Control COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 40 4 Deletion operation Folder and file to be used on advanced recipe are deleted ra Touch and select the file folder to delete Ed Touching Del button displays the dialog mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file folder While executing Processing message appears on the screen Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion Target file ARPOOO1 G1P Are you sure do you want to delete When it cannot be deleted the dialog box shown Cannot delete Source Fi la Saitek in at left appears Only when deleting folder is folder executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again E gt 13 2 6 Precautions 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed Ha Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 5 operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is copied Please select destination Target file ARPOOO1
255. llation 1 Tightening the mounting screw Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop and disable waterproof or oil proof effect Overtightening may damage the unit or distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the display area leading to deterioration of the visibility or incorrect input from the touch panel Also overtightening can disable waterproof or oil proof effect Specified torque range 0 3 to 0 5N m 2 Mounting panel face Make sure that the panel surface is free from warpage flaws and irregularities Warpage flaws and irregularities may disable the waterproof effect Select proper panel thickness under consideration of the panel strength For example the panel strength may be insufficient depending on the panel material and dimensions even if the panel thickness is acceptable Insufficient panel strength may cause warpage depending on the installation positions of the GOT and other equipment INSTALLATION 6 INSTALLATION 6 5 6 5 Installation Procedure 6 INSTALLATION 6 5 Installation Procedure 7 WIRING WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARN ING gt sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by ap
256. lly However misalignment between object position and actual touched position may be caused as usage time passes If misalignment between object position and actual touched position may occur adjust the touch panel position Misalignment between object position and actual touched position may operate an unintended object which causes unintended operation by mis output and mis operation lt x 5 which new data can be written without deleting the written data T 6 Setthe terminating resistor selector switch of the GOT in accordance with the connection type when adopting GOT multidrop Z connection amp 7 Note that this does not guarantee all user s operation environment The protection is not applied when the interface environment protection cover is removed In addition the product may not be used in environments under exposition of oil or chemicals for a long period of time or in environments filled with oil mist a Z gt e E 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 9 asit i88 lt Specifications 5 ftem GT1455 QTBD GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBD GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QLBD GT1450 QLBDE Input power supply voltage 24VDC 10 15 ripple voltage 200mV or less Fuse built in irreplaceable 1 6A Power consumption 7 68W 320mA 24V 8 40W 350mA 24V lt At backlight off 6 72W 280mA 24V 7 44W 310mA 24V a Inrush current 30A or less 26 4VDC 2ms Pelmibelble instantaneous Within 5ms power failure time Noise immunity Noise volt
257. loses the dialog 13 2 Various Data Control 13 43 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 8 Folder create operation 13 44 Folder to be used in advanced recipe is created 1 Touch the Create Folder button 2 The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is eee gt e J K L ZIXICIVIBIN M Enter Touching Enter button displays the dialog box Create new folder shown left 4 Touching OK button starts creating folder 5 When creating folder is completed completion dialog box is displayed Process completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 9 G1P file create operation Advanced recipe file G1P file is created When advanced recipe is only executed on Utility advanced recipe file should be created with this function in advance Advanced Recipe Setting Advanced Recipe Name lproduct 1 AC DE 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 3 3 45 J0DI Target file A ARPOO001 G1P Do you want to create the fi le Continued to next page 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 1 Touch the Create G1P button The screen to select the advanced recipe setting is displayed Select th
258. me password Enter e For enabling the setting of Make a permanent password touch the check box for Make a permanent password and then the setting is switched Operator information edit Disabled OperatorName OPOOUS J Enabled Operator ID 1005 Level 5 Password ly Make a permanent password Use ext auth ID tath OK Cancel f For using the external authentication ID touch the check box Use ext auth ID and switch the setting The external authentication ID is not used V The external authentication ID is used g Touch Ext auth ID to display the external authentication ID input dialog box and enter the external recognition ID When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the authentication method is set to Fingerprint auth or External auth general the external authentication ID can be input with the external authentication device amp lt ja Touch the OK button after all items are input and 22 The operator information editing then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the PIS process is completed i P aoa input operator information is added d oO Touch the Cancel button or the X button and then If you close the screen before the dialog box shown left is displayed pressing 0K button the changed data will be discarded
259. mmunication built into the GOT do not match 486 corresponded to set M o MM Check whether the communication driver set in the Communication communication driver Setting is correct Please turn on the PLC and the 487 Turn the power of the PLC and GOT on again O GOT again Inactive channel No has been set in the project data Inactive channel has been Check whether any unnecessary channel No has been set in the 489 selected at Communication project data Settings Check whether channel Nos set in the project data are set in the Communication Settings 500 Warning Built in battery voltage The voltage of the GOT built in battery is decreased is low Replace the GOT built in battery The value that is input as clock data is out of the input enabled range In this case the input value is not accepted 510 Clock data input out of range x Confirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data and input the proper value again The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the build in flash 520 Insufficient Flash ROM capacity memory x Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified buffering area size The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the user memory Insufficient user memory RAM 521 MAIS RAM x i d Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified buffering area size The old file of different contents has been deleted and a new file has
260. munication driver 8 Extended function OS Write Memory Card Information Option 05 _ AA CO Bl Data Area 16678840 Kbyte fotos Available space of the SD card or USB memory 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 3 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY Wie Nep SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND INSTALLATION OF 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory There are the following two types for the BootOS standard monitor OS installation using the SD card or USB memory 16 4 1 Installing when starting the GOT 16 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT All the OS and project data stored in the SD card or USB memory are transferred to the GOT when powering on the GOT This installing method is effective in the following cases The GOT utility cannot be displayed The standard monitor OS is not installed Installing using the data control function Utility 57 16 3 2 Installing using the program data control function Utility By operating the utility select OS or project data stored in
261. n RAT When the Boot OS version is 2 digits UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY lt amp 2 Ed ps o 9 ps E cS Q Q 5 a iS Ed SS Sie m DLO ase 2 290 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 1 3 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location When download the project data confirm the capacity of the user area in the drive to which transferred the transferred project data size the transfer size and buffering area size of the optional function OS in advance to judge whether to carry out the download The capacities can be confirmed by GT Designer3 For details refer to the following 57 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 13 1 4 Display file The display screen and storage destination for each type of data are shown below The file name and contents of each data can be displayed with property display of the utility BootOS Item Display screen Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS system screen data Standard monitor OS system screen management information file Standard monitor OS monitor function 6 x 8 dot font ASCII characters
262. n if the battery voltage becomes low Item Data type Storage location BootOS BootOS Built in flash memory C drive Standard monitor OS Communication driver Built in SD card A drive Built in flash memory drive Extended function OS Option OS 4 Project data Built in SD card A drive Project data Including recipe setting alarm conditions time action and GOT setup d 1 The USB memory be used from Utility gt 16 3 2 Installing using the program data control function Utility 2 When using the project data stored in the built in SD card A drive with the GOT hold the SD card installed to the GOT The USB memory cannot be activated directly from the E drive It can be used only for data storage 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 1 13 1 Data Storage Location UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt amp a z Ed ns 9 ne a oS Q e 5 a 2 gt Sor m DLO mua GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF At maintenance D drive Built in SRAM PC GT Designer3 A
263. n save backlight Battery alarm display Eu Touch an item to Brightness contrast Setting change settings 11 2 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 1 Display Setting 11 1 3 Display operations E Language 4 1 Touching the setting items displays the Select Language Language screen Opening screen time Sec D Screen save time 0 Min O None 7 Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Brightness contrast Setting x Select Language x 2 Touching the button of a desired language selects the language and returns the screen to the Display screen OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP a lt lt l a 7 a 3 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Language English Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min 0 None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display Brightness contrast Setting 2 Touching x button without touching OK button displays the dialogue box shown the left ei ee button The changed value is canceled and value will be canceled the screen is closed Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed 4 Closing the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents 1 Selectable languages The system message switc
264. n shielding noise from the serial multi drop connection unit 8 OPTION 8 13 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 10 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension GT14 C10EXUSB 4S panel mounted USB port extension is a waterproof extension cable of the USB It is used to pull out the USB interface host on the back of GT14 to the surface of the control panel 8 10 1 Applicable panel mounted USB port extension The following panel mounted USB port extension is applicable for GT14 Model name Description GT14 C10EXUSB 4S Panel mounted USB port extension 8 10 2 Parts name The following shows the parts name of panel mounted USB port extension Cap installation chart Waterproof cap Jeet mea T0 Ferrite core Cable USB plug Model name label Seal Nut T 8 10 3 Installing procedure Bl Installed to panel Install the panel mounted USB port extension as follows with attention to a curve or a distortion of waterproof cap seal and nut Panel thickness 2 to 4mm 0 08 to 0 16inch TS a a 19 4 0 1 0 77 0 01 Unit mm inch Panel Cutting Dimensions The panel thickness is 2 0 to 4 0mm For panel mounted USB port extension the panel surface with waterproof cap is compatible with
265. n1 Screen Design Manual 2 Utility Screen The utility screen is a factory drawn horizontal screen that cannot be edited Installing the BootOS or Standard monitor OS in the GOT from drawing software the utility screen is displayed The utility screen has options for Brightness contrast Memory check etc For details refer to the following 5 9 to 18 1 1 OVERVIEW 1 Features Monitoring for turning ON OFF bit devices of a PLC forced turning ON OFF the bit devices of a PLC monitoring the word device set value current value and changing that numeric values are easily made 1 The display unit is used for engineers stage replacement setting change and troubleshooting or for operation guidance to an operator Monitor Forced turning ON OFF Set value change Trouble check Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices Multiple languages are displayed using the Unicode2 1 compatible fonts and beautiful characters are drawn using the TrueType and high quality fonts Two types of display modes are provided 65536 color display and monochrome display A fine and beautiful full color display which shows even small characters clearly is enabled in the 65536 color display by adopting the high intensity wide viewing angle and high definition TFT color liquid crystal display Also compatible with digital screen displays with 65536 colors BMP etc In the monochrome display
266. name password External auth generan 13 88 E Z When External auth general is selected the check box for Operator name password is displayed EO Ow Set the item for regularly changing the password to be used for the operator authentication 1 to 1000 days 0 Password expiration date is invalid 13 89 8 8 When the password is out of date after setting the password the GOT requests the password change 2 t Set the initial position input byte count of external authentication ID from among the data read from the Initial position input dM external authentication device 0 to 1998 bytes E 8 2 Valid byte count input Set the valid byte count for external authentication ID 2 to 16 bytes E aom i 5 2 Display operation of function setting Debug amp self check Operator setting menu C 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu E 5 Operator management 2 Es 2 B 550 EB system alarm display Tip or E30 cor start tine laret Em Till Ongrator information management z E Sey Debug amp self Operator information check management Function setting Function setting lt amp a z Ed ns O mes SS Q Q 5 a 2 Ed gt Jon m DLO mua Function setting Ruth method Operator name password Automatic logout time 0 min 1 60 0 invalid Password expiration date 0 day 1 1000 0 always Ex
267. need to be independently GT1450 QMBD 1 GT1450 QMBDE Ex GT01 C30R4 8P as shown in tested by the user to demonstrate EMC GT1455 QTBD compliance GT1455 QTBDE Example 1 F Ferrite core GTOTC30RA BP Ex NEC TOKIN ESD R 17S or similar 250mm k 100mm 9 84inch 3 93inch Programmable 1 controller Ee paana FOF F GOT units lt 140mm gt equipped 5 51inch quipp Optional Optional 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 EMC Directive 6 INSTALLATION MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration Never drop cutting chips and electric wire chips into the ventilation window of the GOT when you drill screw holes or perform wiring Otherwise fire failure or malfunction may be caused Connect connection cables securely to the specified connectors while the power is turned OFF Imperfect connection may cause malfunction or failure Operate and store the GOT in en
268. net YOKOGAWA Connection to ALLEN BRADLEY PLC EtherNet IP AB Connection to SIEMENS PLC SIEMENS S7 SIEMENS 57 200 SIEMENS S7 300 400 Microcomputer connection Computer Inverter connection FREQROL 500 700 MODBUS R TCP connection MODBUS TCP Connection to Azbil control equipment Azbil SDC DMC Connection to RKC temperature controller RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Display operation of I O Check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check ILF 9 3 Utility Display Main Ment 907 setup Time setting amp display L Program data control ES Debug amp self check Touch Self check Touch I O check Debug amp self check check Please select check channel 1 RS422 485 CPU 9 8 232 seit 14 14 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check E O check operation 1 Connecting target confirmation Touching CPU button carries out the connecting target confirmation communication check 1 CPU communication check Executing now CPU communication check No error EIN CPU communication check Error The following cause Connect ion error H W error parameter setting error 2 Self loopback After the CPU communication starts normally the dialog box mentioned left notifying that it is on checking until the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally When the connecting target confirmation communication ends its result
269. nfluenced by the electromagnetic wave from the external Immunity electromagnetic sensitivity Items EMC directive thru I Grounding summarize the precautions to use GOT and configure the mechanical unit in order to match the EMC directives Though the data described herein are produced with our best on the basis of the requirement items and standards of the restrictions gathered by Mitsubishi they do not completely guaranteed that all mechanical unit manufactured according to the data do not always match the above directives The manufacturer itself which manufactures the mechanical unit must finally judge the method and others to match the EMC directives EMC directive The standards of the EMC Directive are shown below Test standard EN55011 Radiated noise Test details Electromagnetic emissions from the product are measured Standard value 30M 230MHz QP 30dB 30m in measurement range 230M 1000MHz QP 37dB Li V m 30m in measurement range EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic immunity Immunity test in which static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment 4kV Contact discharge 8kV Aerial discharge EN61000 4 3 Radiated field AM modulation Immunity test in which field is irradiated to the product 80 1000MHz 10V m 1 4 2GHz 3V m 2 0 2 7GHz 1V m 80 AM modulation 1kHz Power line 2kV EN61131 2 Immunity test in which burst noi
270. ng 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN ey Ed 8 Zo 25 Zo 77 22 Clean TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES Precautions for cleaning Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 3 17 3 Cleaning Method 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery 17 4 Replacement Low battery voltage detection and replacement Battery contains the data for notifying the maintenance timing and current time It is recommended that you replace battery periodically For the replacement procedure refer to the following gt 8 3 Battery The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility screen and system alarm For details of the battery status display by the utility screen refer to the following gt 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT To display the message in the system alarm set Battery alarm display to on gt 11 1 1 Function of Display System alarm 500 Warning Built in batter
271. ng Otherwise fire failure or malfunction may be caused When inserting removing a SD card into from the GOT turn the SD card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card When removing a SD card from the GOT make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT and break When installing a USB memory to the GOT make sure to install the USB memory to the USB interface firmly Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact Before removing the USB memory from the GOT operate the utility screen for removal After the successful completion dialog box is displayed remove the memory by hand carefully Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop resulting in a damage or failure of the memory Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight high temperature dust humidity and vibrations When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals use the protective cover for oil Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions Always ground the FG terminal of the GOT power to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT
272. ng data communication 15 15 LED 100M Turns on in green during 100Mbps transmission 4 PARTS NAME 4 2 Back Panel 4 3 Rear Face 10BASE T 100BASE TX E 1 1 Ethernet interface 2 1 2 Description For Ethernet connection to a controller PLC microcomputer board RJ 45 connector 2 Holes for unit mounting fixtures Holes for the mounting fixtures accessory when the GOT is mounted to the panel 4 holes at top and bottom 4 PARTS NAME 4 3 Rear Face 1 2 4 5 4 3 Rear Face Mee 9 cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 1 UL cUL Standards UL cUL Standard are recognized in use by the following combination Model and Hardware version of the GOT LOT Item Model Hardware version of the GOT LOT GT1455 QTBD GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QLBD GOT GT1450 QLBDE Version C or later GT1450 QMBD GT1450 QMBDE RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter GT14 RS2T4 9P LOT 121 or later Checking method of hard ware version Confirm the hardware version with the rating plate of the GOT GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GT1455 QTBDE IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 15 6W MAX S N 1160003 AA PN MAC ADD 12 34 56 78 90 12 ui Hardware MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN version 80M1 IND CONT EQ US LIST
273. nitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or ignite resulting in injury and fire Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure Do not drop or apply strong impact
274. nnen enne 7 5 TA Wiring cce ides LII ea pL Pe Loc dea cate gta ed i dae des 7 5 1 2 2 Outside the panel retener ae eee ee e urea ERE Ced Rap 7 5 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control 7 6 8 OPTION OD Garden En RET 8 1 8 1 1 sApplicable SD C rd in HE eal MS 8 1 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD 8 1 8 2 M 8 3 8 2 1 Applicable USB 8 3 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 8 3 8 3 Battery Me EE 8 4 8 3 1 Applicable battery oed pe a rr teet eti e i pe T er eters ate 8 4 9 3 2 Battery specifications retro P Um ed REP oom ted fgea dites 8 4 8 3 3 Battery replacement procedure nennen nennen 8 5 8 4 Protective Sheet nisse ete ede tede e e Ul eite Lee dade sed eedevd aate utate Eder apri dte bodas 8 6 8 4 1 Applicable protective 8 6 8 4 2 Installing rennen teneant dente a 8 6 8 5 Protective C
275. nonitor ze Be A list editor Debug FX list editor BAe restoration Touch Backup restoration Debug amp self check Backup restoration function Backup restoration function Main menu Setting SYS1IBKUP 1 01 Backup function Device 60T ny Restoration function B GOT Device 55 Delete backup data FX keyword Operation of Backup restoration Backup restore data from the controller to GOT or delete backup data with the backup restoration GOT data package acquisition is also possible For details of backup restoration refer to the following manuals gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 14 2 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 1 Debug 14 2 Self Check 2 The following describes the functions available as the self check function Item Description Reference Z Carries out write read check of the SD card USB memory built in flash memory or internal SRAM Memory check 14 3 2 pasoa BOAO Drawing check Carries out missing bit check color check and drawing check 14 6 S Font check Displays the character data on the screen to check visually 14 10 E Touch panel check Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum unit 2 dots x 2 dots 14 12 E 2 e o check Carries out RS 232 RS 422 485 connecting target confirmation and self loopback check 14
276. now if the path has been switched Check the cable connection status and the PLC CPU status This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU becomes heavier when accessing other stations In such a case transfer the data of the other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host Perform one of the following operations if the PLC scanning time is long COM instruction Extension of END processing Setting of the number of processing times for general data Data update batch processing 451 Q redundant system settings and current config do not match Change the Q redundant setting in accordance with the actual Q redundant CPU system 460 Communication unit error Reset the power of the GOT Replace the unit 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm 18 17 MAINTENANCE AND e INSPECTION APPENDICES Error Channel No Error message Action code storage Channel CH No 1 to 2 to communicate with a controller is not set After setting the Communication Settings on the GT Designer3 Communication channel not set 480 Nu download it to the GOT Set channel number on Utility 2 Change the channel assignment the Communication Setting on the utility a The communication driver set in the Communication Setting and the Communication unit not PN E co
277. nstalled on the GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 75 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt amp a z Ed ns 9 ne e 5 Q e 5 a 2 Ed gt Sor m ooo mua GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 76 b No Operator information edit screen Touch the Add button or touch the Edit button with the operator information selected on the Operator information management screen and then the Operator information edit screen is displayed The operator information can be edited Operator information edit Item Operator Name OperatorName a Operator ID 1004 b Level c Password d a permanent password e Use ext auth ID f Eta ip OK Cance Description The operator name to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added Up to 16 alphanumeric characters The operator ID to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added b tor ID b pce Setting range 1 to 32766 Maximum number of registrations 255 aval The operator security level to be
278. nstalling the CoreOS the latest BootOS is also installed automatically Operation by the user is not required o n 9 a 9 z e gt e 05 lt e z E INSTALLATION COREOS BOOTOS AND 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 11 16 5 CoreOS E Installing the CoreOS E le E Memory card write OE core 05 write stinat e E g Destination Memory Card 1 Write Check GOT Type a o Data can be written into the memory Boot OS Version Write Data Size 16417 Kbyte Procedures for GOT Write Eds Procedures of Core OS Write off the GOT and insert VES TUE ceri whi CU OS bane ER OT il Core OS write starts Je memory car restart the GOT when the writing is completed ation driver project lt Pre SIS 9 ea fot ue GOT or ross dot tase sah wile presse Core OE Wh Otherwise the GOT will be beyond restoration Remove all units attached to Extended I F at the time of processing Core OS write Boot OS write is simultaneously processed along with the processing of Core OS write Close Core0S Install PER RM Ver 05 27 00 AM BAIE you an the installation The internal memory is initialized and return to the state before factory shipment Turn off the SD card access switch before installation f you do not install the 05 turn off the GOT and remove a SD ca
279. nted Example CSV file Path in SD card or USB memory 2 characters 1 character Extension 4 characters Drive name 1 character FS Max 78 characters If folder is assigned the hierarchy The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character b Character strings that cannot be set to folder file The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 AUX CON NUL PRN CLOCK In addition the folder file name shown below cannot be used The folder name which begins with G1 Folder name and file name which begin with period Folder name and file name which finish with period Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods c For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the advanced recipe information screen the file other than that for advanced recipe is not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in SD card or USB memory by using personal computer etc 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 51 13 2 Various Data Control UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING
280. ntents COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 1 11 1 Display Setting 1 Display setting by GT Designer3 Select Common Settings gt GOT Environment Settings gt GOT Setup from GT Designer3 to make the settings of opening screen time screen save time and screen save backlight To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT _ GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Screen save time Using the system information function can compulsorily switch the controller to the screen saving status Forced Screen Saver Disable Signal or disable the screen save time Automatic Screen Saver Disable Signal set with Utility GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 3 Screen save backlight When Screen save backlight is set to ON using the system information function Backlight OFF output signal can switch the backlight OFF from the controller When Screen save backlight is set to OFF the above signal has no effect on the screen save backlight L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 1 2 Display operation of Display Main menu GOT setup play NM Touch Display GOT setup Display PE gt Language Opening screen time Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Scree
281. ntroller connected to the GOT It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Setting Description Adjust the time of GOT clock data to the clock data of controller Adjust Adjust the time of controller clock data to the GOT clock data Broadcast Adjust Broadcast None No adjustment of clock data Time Setting amp display 1 Touching the setup item changes the setup contents Clock setting Adjust Broadcast Adjust Broadcast None 06 16 2011 15 54 59 TUE GOT internal battery None Low voltage status 2 Touching OK button reflects the setup contents Touching the x button restarts the GOT After restarting the GOT operates with the changed setting 1 When connecting with an external device which does not have clock function If set to Adjust or Broadcast for Clock setting while the GOT is connected with external devices PLC or microcomputers which do not have clock function the clock data will not be adjusted For the list of PLC installed with clock function refer to the following 73 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 2 Setting of clock setting and battery When selecting Broadcast or None in clock setting set the clock of the GOT once with connecting a battery to the GOT 3 Operati
282. o When wiring two cables to D 2 one terminal one terminal Cable size For power supply 0 75mm2 or more For grounding 2mm or more Solderless terminal M3 solderless terminal applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A no Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 8N m E m o 7 1 3 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy a Grounding of the GOT may cause electric potential difference and noise interference which may result in GOT malfunctions These problems may be resolved by taking the following measures E Wiring path of the GOT s ground cable and power line 2 Ed Bundling the GOT s ground cable and power line together can cause interference noise which may result in 5 malfunctions Keeping the GOT s ground cable and power line away from each other will help minimize noise interference STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE FG 2 o n o Power supply for power equipment Power supply for power equipment z e Good Wiring the ground cable away from the Bad Bundling the ground cable and E power cable the power cable 3l 2 z 2 E OPTION 7 WIRING 7 3 7 1 Power Supply Wiring E Connecting the ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment to the panel to which the GOT is grounded When running a single ground cable from the panel that houses such piece of control equipment as a PLC to the panel to which the GOT is grounded the gr
283. o can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction If communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out the POWER LED blinks green orange and the display section dims while the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out The POWER LED flickers green orange and the monitor screen appears blank
284. on setting by GT Designer3 Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT 5 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1 Time Setting and Display 2 Clock display Carry out the display and setting of GOT clock data The setup methods of clock data are shown below 5 z n n 1 Touching the clock display section displays the n Time Setting amp display 9 p ay c keyboard for input and stops the clock update 5 Clock setting Adjust 5 2 Input time with the keyboard by referring to the table below 96 16 2011 15 54 59 TUE Input the scheduled time when the operation of 3 is to be carried out since the input time is reflected o5 i i battery None Low at the time of the operation of 3 SES v H 24 vO r LaBe STATUS The day of the week is displayed automatically Sus z according to the input date 2 Ez A EO The effective range of clock setting is as follows S29 Jan 1 2000 to Dec 31 2037 o 2 Description aom 21215 0 199 Input numeric value in cursor position E g m EA a u 4l Move the cursor a8 Move the cursor to the left
285. on the i t without Effective Medii ern cable close to the load can reduce the d 3 BP influence of surge on the GOT Ineffective used The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load Entry area Model name of the surge suppressor Equipment name 18 6 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 5 Grounding status Connection cable Current status Panel grounding The FG cables of the control equipment such as PLC and the power equipment such as servo amplifier are connected as shown by a O Connected O Not connected Servo PLC Connection cable B as SR LG FG GOT Fig A FG Terminal block Terminal block Panel grounding Panel grounding Grounding for I Grounding for power system power system Measure for the FG cables connected Connection cable Fig B Panel grounding Panel grounding Perform independent grounding at two places as shown in Fig A Independent grounding can reduce the influence of noise If independent grounding is not allowed be sure to perform shared grounding as shown in Fig B Effective L1 Ineffective 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 7 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet TROUBLESHOOTING 6 Grounding status of the panel on which the GOT is installed Connec
286. ontrast adjustment screen Opening screen time Sec Screen save time Min 0 None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display For monochrome screen Brightne trast x Brightness setting 2 Brightness can be adjusted by touching key of brightness adjustment 3 Contrast can be adjusted by touching key of contrast adjustment 4 Touching OK button defines the setting contents OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP a 2 lt gt lt l Q a Touching x button without touching OK button With do not push OK button displays the dialogue box shown on the left if you close the screen the changed OK button The changed value is canceled and value will be canceled the screen is closed Cancel button The brightness contrast adjustment screen is displayed 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 5 11 1 Display Setting 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 1 Operation setting functions Setting regarding GOT operation can be set The items which can be set are described below Touching the each item part makes the respective setting become possible Function Description Setting range OFF SHORT LONG Buzzer volume setting Buzzer volume setting can be changed At factory shipment SHORT ON OFF Window move buzzer volume setting Whether turn ON OFF buzzer when move window can be selected At fact
287. onversion adapter The following connector conversion adapter is applicable Model name Description GT10 9PT5S For GOT multi drop connection 8 8 2 Installing procedure of connector conversion adapter 1 Tumthe GOT power off va Connect the connection conversion adapter to the RS 422 485 interface on the GOT 3 Fix the connection conversion adapter to the GOT using the provided M3 tapping screws Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 8 OPTION 8 11 8 8 Connector Conversion Adapter OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION ee WIRING 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection unit GOT serial multi drop connection is a communication method for 1 N communication by connecting multiple GOTs to one PLC using the GT01 RS4 M serial multi drop connection unit For details of GOT multidrop connection refer to the following gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Serial multi drop connection unit ga Connect to the PLC RS 485 cable 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop connection unit The following serial multi drop connection unit is applicable Model name Description GT01 RS4 M For GOT multi drop connection
288. or dirt when the touch key of GOT display section is operated For the GOT the protective sheet is attached for transportation It is different from the one described in this chapter 8 4 1 Applicable protective sheet Product name Model name Description GT14 50PSCB Clear 5 sheets GT14 50PSCB Antiglare 5 sheets Protective sheet 5 7 protective sheet GT14 50PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets GT14 50PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets 8 4 2 Installing procedure 1 Ifthe protective sheet has been already attached to the E GOT remove the old one from the GOT display section holding the lower right corner If the protective sheet for transportation is attached to the GOT remove it too 2 Remove the release paper from the back of a new protective sheet Do not remove the protective film 3 Make sure to fit the sheet on the GOT without wrinkles or air between the sheet and the GOT 4 Remove the protective film from the protective sheet E When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed Replacement time of protective sheet Check the status of the protective sheet visually by the daily inspection The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceed replacement promptly 8 6 8 OPTION 8 4 Protective Sheet 8 5 Protective Cover for Oil Use of the protective cover for oil improves waterproof
289. or the GOT1000 series is classified as shown the table below 2 Appendix 3 2 Transportation guidelines a g Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult your transportation company a um W Q lt APPENDICES App 9 Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions App 10 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions A MSU editor ee id eR edat 14 1 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS A 15 Adjusting the touch panel position 11 13 Advanced recipe information 13 33 Alarm information ssssee 13 11 B Backlight Shutoff Detection 17 7 14 2 Backup Restoration Setting 11 19 2 8 4 17 4 Battery alarm display 11 1 11 4 Behavior of Duplicate 11 22 cho c 16 1 Brightness 11 1 11 5 Buzzer volume Setting 11 6 11 8
290. ormation OS information Select drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Number Item 1 Select drive OS information Storage file folder display screen OS information ma ane 4 155 Size Date Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected When the SD card is not installed A Built in SD card is not displayed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed Time x 15520KB 38605208KB 1 1 1 File Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder 2 Kind 2 In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed 3 Name When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21st character or after are not displayed 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed 7 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 9 Number of files
291. ory shipment Security level change screen can be displayed Security setting screen change 11 2 4 Security level change Utility call key setting screen can be displayed Utility call k h AS 37 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting The sensitivity of touch panel when GOT screen is touched can be set Key sensitivity setting E g a setting can be changed when double touch is made when touching 1 to 8 the GOT screen only once For preventing chattering Touch panel reading error can be corrected Touch calibrati MODO Ea 11 2 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration Set the setting items related with USB mouse keyboard USB keyboard setti MM LM 57 11 2 7 USB mouse keyboard setting 0 to 3600 seconds VNC server function setting The authorization guarantee time for the VNC server function can be set lt At factory shipment 0 seconds gt 1 Relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed The larger the set value in Key sensitivity is the shorter the time taken from touching the touch panel until the GOT responds becomes E g decrease the value set for Key sensitivity when double touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once Decrease the reaction speed The relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed is as follows Quick response Slow response Key sensitivity setting 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
292. ound cable from s the panel that Ground cable from houses control the panel that FG equipment houses control Ferrite core Use the thickest equipment cable possible Use the thickest Panel cable possible grounding Remedy 2 1 Remedy 2 2 7 WIRING 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 1 Wiring inside Run power lines servo amplifier drive wires and communication cables so that they do not cross each other Noise interference that is generated by cables that cross each other may cause malfunctions Surge suppressors are an effective way to filter out surge noise that is generated from no fuse breakers NFB electromagnetic contactors MC relays RA solenoid valves and induction motors For surge killers refer to the section to follow 57 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment Uncrossed power lines and Crossing power lines and communication cables communication cables GOT connection cable PLC I O wire Terminal block Terminal block 7 2 2 Outside the panel To pull the power line and communication cable out of the panel make two pullout holes away from each other and pull the cables through Putting both cables through the same pullout hole will increase noise interference Power line Power line Connection gt b QA cable Connection x 5 cable p Pullout hole Pullout hole Keep the power line and communication cable inside the
293. ound cable may have to be directly connected to the terminal on the GOT Connection cable Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment If electric potential difference between the ground points created by it causes malfunctions lowering the voltage as shown in Remedy 1 below may solve the problem Remedy 1 Refer to the figures Remedy 1 1 and 1 2 below If the electric potential difference between the ground cable and the panel that houses the GOT is creating problems connect the ground cable to the panel also If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 1 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 1 2 Connection cable Connection cable Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible Remedy 1 1 Remedy 1 2 If taking Remedy 1 worsens noise interference taking Remedy 2 may alleviate it Remedy 2 Refer to the figures Remedy 2 1 and 2 2 below Attach a ferrite core to the cable if noise from the GOT panel has adverse effects on the GOT when Remedy 1 is taken Wind the wire around the ferrite core several times approx 3 times if a ferrite core is used If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 2 2 Connection cable Connection cable Gr
294. over for Oll iti petat e e e aret Hee een ee ted obe ER d 8 7 8 5 1 Applicable protective cover for oil 8 7 8 5 2 Installing aai sese da na inanes TEARS 8 7 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover ssssssssssssssssesseneee eene 8 9 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection 8 9 8 6 2 Installing proced re iconic eto donare dt eL De dta ec Uu Ld bin d De a D dues 8 9 N E E E e EE E ETE EEI EEN rdiet pr ira aen ee ne 8 10 8 7A Applicable stand socis e tsi eate e e ated 8 10 procede ece a m ig e A 8 10 8 8 Connector Conversion Adapter 8 11 8 8 1 Applicable connector conversion adapter sss 8 11 8 8 2 Installing procedure of connector conversion 8 11 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection 8 12 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection amp 8 12 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop connection 8 12 8 9 3 Installations iet o e PNE ee t dee tei ab i e tsi ettet 8 12 8 943 iParts iatIe eee
295. ox sou really want to ex cute shown left appears for recheck Touching the OK button starts the initialization Touching the Cancel button cancels the initialization 4 The completion dialog box appears when the initialization is completed Touching the OK button closes the dialog box 13 70 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 2 Operation to restore data SRAM control 7 To restore data in the drive to the SRAM user area ORAM contro A Function nane Setting ID Select the drive where the data is stored and then Setting name Size Time touch the Restoration button Advanced sys alarm 24 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 E 0 5 07 22 11 13 00 ge user alarm 1 25 UKB 475 DKB Backup restoration Drive 2 8MB 3 76B amp 2 The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To restore all Created date 11 06 10 14 08 data in the SRAM user area touch the OK button The above data will be restored After completion of restoration GOT To cancel the restoration touch the Cancel button will be rebooted Do you want to execute restoration will be rebooted 3 When touching the OK button 2 the dialog box Do you really want to execute shown left appears for recheck Touching the OK button starts the restoration Touching the Cancel button cancels the restoration COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND
296. panel For menu call key setting refer to the following 57 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting 3 When the utility call key is set to the zero point Even when the utility call key is set to the zero point you can display the main menu using either of the following two operations Pressing the special function switch set on the user created screen Keeping pressing the upper left corner while the Booting message is displayed after powering up 9 6 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 3 Utility Display 3 When touching special function switch utility Touching the special function switch utility while user created screen is displayed displays the main menu The special function switch utility can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user created screen by GT Designer3 Communication setting Special function switch Utility Language For the details of the special function switch refer to the following lt gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 4 When powering ON the system The Booting message is displayed after powering up After that keep pressing the upper left corner to display the main menu If the upper left corner is pressed before the display of the Booting message the OS installation function starts Therefore press the upper left corner after the Booting message is displayed Booting gt Press the screen upper left corner during Boot
297. plying 100 or less which is used E exclusively for the GOT 2 Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction 5 Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the m g product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT E Not doing so can cause fire failure or malfunction E D WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction 5 Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit 2 a lt a This chapter describes the wiring to the GOT power supply section For the connection with a PLC refer to the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 For the dimensional drawing of connection cables refer to the following gt Appendix 1 External Dimensions STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL x A 0 000 0 _ General preventive measur
298. power supply of the printer Any value that cannot be converted to a BCD BIN value is being 345 BCD BIN conversion error displayed input Correct data Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer The contents of the recipe file are not normal 351 Recipe file error Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the SD card or USB memory x Confirm content of recipe file Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the SD card or USB memory format Recipe file make error Failed to generate recipe file 352 Reboot GOT after inserting x Reboot the GOT after installing the SD card or USB memory memory card rae Failed to write in the recipe file Unable to write Recipe file Confirm the write protection of the SD card or USB memory 353 Confirm memory card is x inserted Confirm the contents of the SD card or USB memory i Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while recipe is operating AUN Error occurred while writing in the recipe file 354 Recipe file write error lum gt x Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while recipe is operating Error occurred while reading in the recipe file Rn Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while recipe is operating 355 Recipe file read error a x Confirm the contents device value of the recipe file in the SD card or USB memory 18 14 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18
299. pprox 50 000h Time for contrast to become 1 5 at operating ambient temperature of 25 Backlight LED type irreplaceable Backlight off screen saving time can be set Touch panelt Life Approx 70 000h or longer Time for display intensity reaches 50 at operating ambient temperature of 25 C Type Analog resistive film Key size Minimum 2 X 2 dots per key Number of points touched simultaneously Simultaneous presses not allowed Only 1 point can be touched Life 1 million times operating force 0 98N max m Built in flash memory 9Mbytes for storing project data and OS Memory Life Number of write times 100 000 times D drive SRAM internal 512Kbytes battery backup GT11 50BAT lithium battery Clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value Battery Backup angst advanced alarm HAE iine logging hard copy id SRAM user area Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 RS 422 485 1ch Transmission speed 115200 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800bps Connector shape D Sub 9pin Female RS 422 485 Application For communicating with a controller Terminating resistor Open 110 9 3300 Switched by terminating resistor selector switch 9 At factory shipment 3300 RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115200 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800bps RS 232 Connector shape D Sub 9pin Male Application For communicating with a controller connecting a ba
300. property oil resistance and chemical resistance of the GOT z gt 8 5 1 Applicable protective cover for oil The following protective cover for oil is applicable for GT14 Product name Description Protective cover for oil 5 7 protective cover for oil 23 8 5 2 Installing procedure bz 29 POINT T 4 5 Before attaching protective cover for oil 5 protective film is attached on the display area when the GOT is shipped Make sure to remove the protective film before attaching the protective cover for oil For attaching the protective cover for oil to the GOT already mounted the control panel follow the procedures as i below Remove the GOT from the control panel Make sure to externally shut off all phases of the power supply and remove all cables from the GOT in advance Clean dirt off surfaces of the GOT and control panel 5 2 lt GOT Te Position the POWER LED frame of the cover to the POWER LED on the GOT front face and the direction of the cover is decided STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 2 Protective Cover For oil D Please do not pull the oil cover more than the necessity 2 One corner of the cover is pulled outside and it hangs and do not bend it extremely it on the corner of the front panel of GOT The seat part and the rubber part in the display part might flake off Protective Cover For oil lt zl x 7 z The corner is hung o z
301. r the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the copy When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 58 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 5 Move operation An operation log file is moved s Information Please select destination Target file LOGO0001_0001 G1L Do you want to move the fi le Target file LOGO0001_0001 G1L Do you want to Overwrite the fi le Process completed 1 Touch and select the file to move 2 Touch the Move button 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When any file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels moving When moving is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 59 13 2 Various Data Control COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 60 6 Rename operation An operation
302. r New folder is created 13 44 E Create G1P New 1 file of advanced recipe file is created 13 45 a 23 ac record GOT gt Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller 13 47 4 e 4 PLC ica 2a 5 d PLC u Z ave recor Advanced recipe DE The device of controller is saved in selected record 13 48 zZ g record list screen Match records Selected record is verified to the device value of controller 13 49 PLC Si Delete Device Value The device value contained in selected record is deleted 13 50 a n 52 dog o gt 5 Em e Hag i 59 apo Sz 20 amp o mm On N 2 Eo DE 568 592 PE Jes ame 200 13 33 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Display operation of Advanced Recipe information Main menu C 9 3 Utility Display nical GOT setup Time setting amp display Program datagontrol Touch Program data control Program data control ha Alarm information rm Project information m Hard copy information Pa Advanced Red A Built in SD D nternal SRAM 13 34 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of Advanced Recipe information z 1 Advanced recipe information screen 5 z Advanced Recipe Information m Advanced Recipe Informat
303. r code reader RFID connecting a PC project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function Built in Data transfer method 100BASE TX 10BASE T 1ch interface Connector shape RJ 45 modular jack Only for models equipped with Ethernet Application For communicating with a controller using the gateway function connecting a PC project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function USB Full Speed 12Mbps Host 1ch Connector shape TYPE A Application For transferring data storing data USB USB Full Speed 12Mbps device 1ch Connector shape Mini B Application For connecting a PC project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function SD standard 1ch SD card Supported memory card SDHC memory card SD memory card Application For uploading downloading project data OS installation storing logging data Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Protective structure IP67f front section of the panel only External dimensions W164 6 46 x H135 5 32 x D55 2 17 mm inch Weight Approx 0 7kg Excluding mounting fixtures Compatible software package GT Designer3 version 3 SPECIFICATIONS Version1 37P or later Version1 118Y or later Version1 34Lor later 3 2 Performance Specifications 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It
304. r later version the version information and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed Depending on the Installation method the dialog box to be displayed varies When installing from the built in SD card the dialog box is displayed by the main unit When installing from GT Designer3 via USB or Ethernet the dialog box is displayed by the GT Designer3 2 When install Standard monitor OS communication driver Option OS When Standard monitor OS communication driver or Option OS has already been installed the version information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed Moreover when the different versions will coexist among all OSs Standard monitor OS communication driver and Option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the installation process is canceled 3 When download project data GOT automatically compares the version between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS When the versions are different the dialog confirming whether to install the OS together is displayed When downloading the project data from the SD card or USB memory storing the project data and OS beforehand is recommended The version of each OS installed in the GOT can be confirmed by Property of OS information screen Property ame OS Name Date Time Kind Size 11 17 Version 06
305. rate the 5V power supply 1 Touchthe 5V power supply button in Communication Setting Communication Setting Standard F Setting 8 ChNo RS422 485 1 MELSEC EX E ChNo RS232 9 Mul tidrop slave ppm Sud 225 Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FR device Eel B External device 9 PC connection mcr 2 Touchthe setting item of BV power supply when using the RS 232 485 conversion adaptor The setting content is changed by touching YES PM power supply 3 Select Yes to change the setting of the 5V power supply Touching the OK button reflects the changed settings Touching x button returns the screen to the Communication Setting screen Communication Setting Standard I F Setting RS422 485 MELSEC FX power supply YES Mul tidrop slave Host PC Ethernet Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device B External device 9 PC connection 3 ea Ssien CH Driver assign indicating the setting to supply the 5V power supply is displayed 4 Touch the OK button in the Communication Setting screen 3 Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 7 10 1 Communication setting 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10 2 1 Communication detail setting functions Function Communica
306. rd CoreO0S Install Ver 05 27 00 AM s BRE MOBO ERU Warnin CES mt turn off the power supply Do not push the reset button Writing data Phase Progress CoreO0S Install Ver 05 27 00 AM amp T LX Lis Bod Y DH SEE Installation is completed Turn off GOT and remove SD card Phase VEL LLL Progress BSE 2A lt Please install the Standard 05 TS SCREGEOS BootOS Version 05 27 00 AM 16 12 16 5 CoreOS 4 Write the CoreOS from GT Designer3 to the SD card For details of GT Designer3 operation refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals After confirming that the GOT is powered off install the SD card in the GOT After installing switch the SD card access switch on Powering the GOT on displays the screen on the left To cancel the installation power the GOT off and remove the SD card Turning the SD card access switch off executes CoreOS installation When the installation is completed the dialog as shown on the left is displayed The POWER LED of the GOT blinks green orange at the installation completion Confirm that the message is displayed and power the GOT off Remove the SD card after powering the GOT off Powering the GOT on again displays the screen as shown on the left The GOT goes to the status of factory shipment Install OS Standard mon
307. rd or USB memory Cannot access Logging Files 612 Turn on the SD card access switch x Check the memory card If the SD card or USB memory have unnecessary files delete the files Insert a SD card or USB memory 613 Error in writing logfile Turn on the SD card access switch x Check if the SD card or USB memory is writable Insert a SD card or USB memory 614 Error in reading logfile Turn on the SD card access switch x Check if the SD card or USB memory is readable The server does not work normally or the connection path to the server is 615 Cannot connect to MES Server made up incorrectly x Check the Server Check the operating conditions of the server Check the network to the server The settings for the SNTP server are wrong or the network to the SNTP 616 Cannot connect to SNTP Server server is made up incorrectly T Check the Server Check the operating conditions of the STNP server Check the network to the SNTP server Reconfigure the GOT FTP client setting 640 An error occurred in a FTP client Check the operating status and network line of the FTP server process For the error details check the GOT special register GS989 FTP communication error notification 800 Abnormal module status Refer to explanations of SB0020 on the applicable network manual O 801 Abnormal baton passing status Refer to explanations of SB0047 on the applicable network manual O Abnormal cyclic transmission
308. reen in displayed Touch an item to be set a Automatic logout time b Auth method c Password expiration date d Initial position input e Valid byte count input Touch Automatic logout time and then the Automatic logout time edit dialog box is displayed Input the time When the input is completed touch the Enter key Authentication method Switch the authentication method Touch the item to switch the display between Operator name password External auth general Fingerprint auth Operator name password c Touch Password expiration date and then the Password expiration date edit dialog box is xpiration date edit displayed Input the expiration date When the input is completed touch the Enter key d Initial position input Set the initial position input byte count of external authentication ID from among the data read from the external authentication device e Valid byte count input T J enter Set the valid byte count for external authentication ID Only available when the external authentication general is set as the authentication method 4 Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input setting is saved The function setting editing process is completed Touch the Cancel button or the X button and If you close the screen before then the dialog box shown left is display
309. rious Data Control E Display example of Project information Project information Project information Select drive 13 18 A Built in SD card C Flash D Memor y Internal SRAM Project information Storage file folder display screen X Project information 576KB 3862528KB Y File Property Data check Number Item Description The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected 1 Select drive When the SD card is not installed A Built in SD card is not displayed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed 2 Kind Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder The file is indicated with an extension while the folder is indicated with DIR Displays the project data Project Folder in the selected drive 3 Name When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed The project data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 7 The size of drive ugs LI ds p Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 8 Operation switch Displays the ex
310. roneous Data error EIN Touching Property button after selecting the property displaying target folder displays the Property screen shown left In the Property screen the following information is displayed for each file selected by Item Description Name Displays the file name Size Displays the file size Displays the following items according to the kind of the files Boot BootOS Kind Basic Standard monitor OS Extend Extend function OS Option Optional function OS Comm Communication driver Version Displays the version of BootOS and OS Date Time Displays the date and time of the file creation Touching A button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching button scrolls up down the screen by one screen Touching x button returns the screen to the previous screen display Touch Data check button after selecting a data check target file The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 2 Alarm information 2 o E Function of alarm information The extended alarm log file or alarm log file held by each drive A Built in SD Flash Memory Internal 2 SRAM USB drive is displayed The functions below can be carrie
311. roved please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Depending on the problem details we may ask you to return the troubled product to us In that case please attach the GOT status check sheet GOT installation status check sheet and the system configuration check sheet filled out with details of your system 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet E GOT installation status check sheet Check the current installation status of the GOT you are using against the GOT installation status described in the upper column of items 1 to 7 When the measure described in the lower column is needed take the measure for the current status When the measure is taken check the result Effective or Ineffective 1 Panel inside wiring Current status The power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable are mixed in the duct Mixed O Not mixed Measure for the cables mixed Wiring the power line and communication cable in the panel without mixing them in the duct can reduce the influence of noise Effective O Ineffective 2 Panel outside wiring Power line Current status Communication cable Installed together O Not installed ogether The power line and communication cable are installed together Power line Communication cable Fig A Measure for the cables installed together i line
312. ry Hard copy information Storage file folder display screen Hard information i NPROJECT 1 indame Size Date Time z 06 28 11 14 27 T 280KB 3862528KB y Del Copy Rename 5 Number Item Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected i When SD card or USB memory is not installed the following drives are not displayed 1 Select d 1 Em SD card A Built in SD card USB memory E USB drive 2 Kind Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc 13 2 4 I Hardcopy information operation 3 Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed 7 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive Operation switch Execution switch of each function Number of files
313. ry Unable to save device value to advanced recipe file Unable to save device value to 583 Confirm the write protection of the SD card or USB memory x Advanced recipe file S Confirm whether the attribute of saving file is for reading only An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file writing 584 Advance recipe file save error Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while the Advanced Recipe x is operating An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file reading 585 Advanced recipe file upload error Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while the Advanced Recipe x is operating 586 Specified Advanced recipe The advanced recipe of non existing number is about to be executed x number does not exist Execute advanced recipe of existing number 587 Specified record number does The advanced record of non existing number is about to be executed g not exist Execute record of existing number Saving recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe device value cannot be edited Cannot save recipe data to read 588 ae Make the recipe device value of the record editable with Advanced x n Recipe Setting of GT Designer3 or specify the record of which recipe device value can be edited Saving recipe is about to be executed to the advanced recipe setting that Recipe device save error Recipe 589 is set for not using file x file does not exist f Specify t
314. s opened Environmental protective structure of USB interface is IP2X when the USB environmental protection cover is opened 8 OPTION 8 9 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION ee WIRING 8 7 Stand Stand is used to fix the GOT to standing status in order to debug the monitor screen data easily 8 7 1 Applicable stand The following stand is applicable for GT14 Product name Description Stand GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 for GOT1000 series 8 7 2 Installing procedure Adjust to 1 Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle 45 55 65 or 75 adjusting fitting of the stand Angle adjusting fitting 2 Put the GOT into the stand from the stand front side and fix it using the mounting fixtures For how to mount the GOT refer to the following 6 5 Installation Procedure For a detail of the stand refer to the following gt GOT1000 STAND User s Manual GOT mounting face 8 10 8 OPTION 8 7 Stand 8 8 Connector Conversion Adapter GT10 9PT5S type connector conversion adapter enables an easy crossover wiring for the multi drop connected GOTs For the wiring between the connector conversion adapter and the controller refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 8 8 1 Applicable connector c
315. se is EN61000 4 4 y Digital 1 0 24V or higher 1kV 2007 applied to the power line and signal ae Fast transient burst noise lings Digital I O 24V or less gt 250V Analog I O signal lines gt 250V Power line between line and ground 0 5kV EN61000 4 5 Immunity test in which lightening surge d n Power line between lines 0 5kV Surge immunity is applied to the product Data communication port 1kV EN61000 4 6 Immunity test in which a noise inducted Power line 10V Conducted RF immunity on the power and signal lines is applied Data communication port 10V Test for checking normal operations EN61000 4 8 under the circumstance exposed to the Power supply frequency pus f 30 A m HE ferromagnetic field noise of the power magnetic field immunity supply frequency 50 60Hz 1 The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel The above test items are conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on the conductive control panel and combined with the Mitsubishi PLC 2 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 3 above test items are conducted in the following conditions 30M 230MHz QP 40dBHV m 10m in measurement range 230M 1000MHz QP 47dBHV m 10m in measurement range 5 2 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 EMC Directive Control panel GOT is an open type device device installed to another device an
316. se management function g Registers deletes the license of the VNC server function E 2 o For the details of the VNC server function refer to the following T zoz gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions EFE B28 ll Displaying the License management Main Menu GOT setup 57 9 3 Utility Display setup E display Operation Es gl Transparent mode N 9 2 z o 2 a Erm LIN l a Aa 209 il ckup restoration setting A Debug amp self che GOT setup Behavior of duplicate IPs mi License managemen Touch License management TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY License management License management VNC server function FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK WNC is a trademark of RealVNC Ltd CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 25 11 6 License Management E Setting operation of License management 1 When registering a license number for the GOT License management X 1 Touch the license number input area on the license VNC server function management screen and then the keyboard License number Regist appears on the bottom of the screen 2 Touch the Regist but
317. set The unauthorized equipment cannot obtain the authorization until the set time elapses Authorization guarantee time cancel signal GS1792 b8 When the Authorization guarantee time cancel signal GS1792 b8 turns on the authorization guarantee time setting is disabled E Displaying the VNC server function setting Main menu GOT setup Operation Operation gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Kes peed Touch panel calibration Setting Touch Tac ibratioi m USB ncuse evboar d Setting oar m ver func setting Setting GOT setup Operation iene scroll lower VNC server function setting VNC server function setting Operating priority guaranteed time o sec VNC server function setting operation 1 Operating priority guaranteed time AR B 1 Touch the input field for Operating priority Operating priority guaranteed time guaranteed time to display a keyboard SEC Input the authorization guarantee time with the keyboard 7 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button returns the screen to the operation setting screen 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 17 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 2 9 2 2
318. setting to Screen saving backlight off in the utility of GOT Z GOT set up For details refer to the following au L gt 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP id ac 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm When the GOT detects a backlight shutoff the system information set with drawing software is turned on You can issue a backlight shutoff of the GOT from the PLC to external devices such as the lamp or buzzer using system information t To avoid any screen touch operation by the user who misunderstands it is in screen saving mode install an external S alarm and interlock the loads that would cause danger fi For details of the system information refer to the following amp gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals x 1L 1L Example of alarm output to external device lamp buzzer etc The following provides an example of outputting the backlight shutoff detection signal from a FX Series PLC to an external device using system information Condition The Write Device is D20 and all data is used the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b14 Backlight shutoff detection System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a backlight shutoff Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 Mov D36 20 Backlight shutoff detection M34 Output to
319. sion 4 The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed Touching OK button closes the dialog Process completed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Deletion operation Deletes selected files Touch and select the file to delete Touching Delete button displays the dialog Delete project data mentioned left PROJECT 1 Touching OK button deletes the file Do you want to delete Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion 9 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed Delete is completed Touching OK button closes the dialog COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 15 13 2 Various Data Control 4 Copy operation Copies the selected file h Dialog for selecting a copy destination drive 2 Alarm information Belect drive A Built in SD card 3 C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Please select a destination 4 The target file to copy AAMOOOO1 G1A Do you want to copy the fi le 9 The file of the same name already exists Copy is completed Touch and select the file to copy Touching Copy button displays the message Please select a destination in the left bottom of the Screen If the copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination
320. splayed 4 Size Displays the data size 5 Setting name Displays the setting name For the setting name only characters within the display range are displayed 6 Date and time Displays the creation date and time of each data 7 Number of selected files Displays the information of the items currently selected 8 SRAM area Displays the current free space size or total size of the SRAM user area 9 Drive space Displays the current free space size or total size of the drive selected for Select drive 10 Initialize all Initializes all areas of the SRAM user area 11 Initialize selected area Select each area of the SRAM user area to initialize multiple areas of the SRAM user area 12 Select drive Switches drives to be used for the data backup or restoration in the SRAM user area Saves the data in the selected drive to SRAM user area The following drives can be switched only when a SD card or USB memory is installed 13 Restoration SD card A Built in SD card USB memory E USB drive 14 Backup all area Saves data in the SRAM user area to the selected drive 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 69 13 2 Various Data Control GOT SELF CHECK INSTALLATION OF COMMUNICATION DISPLAY AND CLOCK SETTINGS AND e m lt gt X 1 e a INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS G
321. t Delete Clear Protect Default K Communication parameter setting by drawing software Select Common Settings Communication Settings from GT Designer3 to enter the communication parameters for each communication driver When changing the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 10 8 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 2 Communication Detail Setting E Assign Ethernet I F Several drivers are assigned to the same Ethernet interface However only one GOT IP address is assigned per interface By changing the settings of one interface the GOT IP address GOT port No download default gateway and subnet mask settings of other drivers which are assigned to the same interface are also changed ICTUMEEDESESHIZE x 1 Touch the Assign Ethernet I F button in Standard F Setting icati i uU Communication Setting MELSEC FX Definition of ChNo D None 1 2 FA device B External device 9 PC connection COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 2 Touch the driver display BOX of the communication parameter to be set in Ethernet I F assignment Ethernet F assignment Ethernet standard I F Ethernet standard I F Ni Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FR device ther
322. t auth ID Initial position input Valid byte count input 0 Byte 0 199 2 Byte 2 16 OK GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 87 13 2 Various Data Control 13 88 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Function setting operation x t Operator setting menu 4 Operator management Password change Is Function setting Function setting Ruth nethod 0 ninci 60 0 invalid Password expiration date 9 day 1 1000 0 always Rutomatic logout time Ext auth ID Initial position input 1 Byte 0 1998 Valid byte count input 4 _ Byte 2 16 OK Cancel Automatic logout time edit x a Input automatic logout time Automatic logout time ens Touch Function setting in the operator setting menu and then the Admin password authentication dialog box is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the Function setting sc
323. ta is not downloaded or the screen data is not sufficient Download screen data Download the project data or screen data The monitor device of the object is not set 307 Monitor device not set x Set the monitor device of the object 308 No comment data The comment file does not exist Download comment Create the comment file and download to GOT 309 Device reading error The error occurred when reading a continuous device x Correct device Correct the device Specified base screen window screen does not exist in the project 310 Project data does not exist or out data x of range Specified base screen window screen is out of the permissible area Specify the existing base screen window screen No of alarm has exceeded The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the alarm history 311 upper limit display function has exceeded the maximum points x Delete restored alarm Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory No of sampling has exceeded and Accumulate Average were set in the scatter graph 312 upper limit Approve Clear trigger setup in the scatter graph x Delete collected data Set the Operation at frequency over time to Initialize and Continue in scatter graph 315 Device writing error Error occurred while writing in the device x Correct device Correct the device In indirect specifi
324. tage status 12 3 3528 55 zog 859 amp 269 GE a gt Gn e W SEZ Ow E When the time is changed on the Time setting amp display screen the changed time is written in a programmable controller even though Adjust or Broadcast is set for Time setting As a result the time of the programmable controller can be changed on the GOT even though Adjust is set for lt Time setting The clock data of the controller set as Adjust CH No of Time setting GOT Setup Clock Setting from GOT 2 5 Environment Settings of GT Designer3 is changed amp For details of Adjust and Broadcast refer to the following manual BES gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 483 E Display operation of time setting Main menu Time setting amp display LCS 9 3 Utility Display Time Setting amp display gt Clock setting GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK gt Time setting amp display Set the Time setting 2 2 06 16 2011 15 54 59 TUE and Clock setting i ae GOT internal battery None Low S voltage status ZE O0 COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1 12 1 Time Setting and Display E Operation of time setting 12 2 1 Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and the clock data of co
325. tal protection cover protects the USB connector on the front face of GOT from dust water and oil The GOT is installed with the USB environmental protection cover at factory shipment Replace when damage and deterioration are caused 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover The following USB environmental protection cover is applicable for GT14 Product name Description USB i tal a GT14 50UCOV Environmental protection cover for USB interface on the main unit front panel conforming to IP67f protection cover 8 6 2 Installing procedure 1 Turn the GOT power off USB environmental protection cover 2 Disconnect the USB cable from the GOT if one is connected ow 0 d Open the USB environmental protection cover 2 Mounting screw equipped with the GOT and remove the mounting Screws 4 Remove the old USB environmental protection cover from the GOT to replace it with the new USB environmental protection cover 5 Fix the projection of the new USB environmental protection cover to be fitted into the hole of the GOT tighten the mounting screw in the specified torque range then install it to the GOT Tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Not doing so may cause a damage or a drop Specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m Mounting screw M3 x 6 pan head screw M3 x 6 pan head screw Precautions when the USB environmental protection cover i
326. tallation 50 Do you want to install After executing or canceling installation restart the 26 GOT HO On 12 e GOT screen when BootOS is installed from SD card or USB memory lt 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 9 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS E Standard monitor OS installation Match the version of each OS file when installing standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS cannot be installed if the version of each OS file does not match When the installation process is discontinued When the installation process is normally executed Standard monitor OS EN Standard monitor OS 2 Communication driver e Communication driver 2 Optional function OS L240 O Optional function OS 2 0 0 Please match the number Checking method of BootOS standard monitor OS version Check the version of BootOS or standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility For details refer to the following C37 13 2 1 OS information Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face When the Boot OS version is 2 digits GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL only the lower digit is printed GT1455 QTBDE IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 8 40W MAX Example H W version H SIN 1160003 HD Boot OS version AD HD ADD 12 34 56 78 9
327. tarts automatically after the installation is completed When the standard monitor OS is already installed the GOT restarts by touching the OK button After confirming normal restart remove USB memory from the USB interface of the GOT For removing methods of the USB memory refer to the following 13 2 9 USB device status display 2 Installation by pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen When the OS boot drive is set to the A or E drive installation by pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen is not available 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 3 2 Installing using the program data control function Utility 2 For details on program data control function refer to the following L gt 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL z z e e POINT Precaution on executing program data control function 8 When execute program data control function standard monitor OS has be installed in advance Thus oF this function cannot be used for the initial installation of standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT SES Install standard monitor OS by the following two methods sus 1 GT Designer3 28 zo 2 Installing when starting the GOT N Operation procedure 2 1 When installing with SD card xoc gt OS information 7 Power OFF
328. the GOT while the SD card access LED is lit 5 GOT restarts automatically after the installation 2 2 E Reboot is completed When the standard monitor OS is already installed 5 2 E the GOT restarts by touching the OK button gee 6 After confirming normal restart switch off the SD card access switch of the GOT Confirm that the z card access LED is not lit and remove the SD card 25 from the SD card interface of the GOT ES BES SS os z38 Em o8 ut Mo 02 O el W B25 gt ie oi o2 2 On O u Qe 592 FE 206 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 5 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 6 2 When installing with USB memory Now installing BootOS Reboot 1 Drives to be used When installing OS at power on use the A or E drive Power off the GOT and install the USB memory where the BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the USB interface of the GOT The BootOS cannot be stored in the USB memory where the standard monitor OS or project data is stored Power on the GOT while pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen 1 point press installation function The BootOS or standard monitor OS is installed in the built in flash memory Do not pull out the USB memory or power off the GOT while install execution The GOT res
329. the SD card or USB memory and transfer them to the GOT Precautions on installing BootOS standard monitor OS 1 2 3 4 Installing both BootOS and standard monitor OS After completing BootOS installation install standard monitor OS When installing BootOS the built in flash memory in the GOT is initialized and goes to the status at factory shipment All OS and project data are erased BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when not upgrading it Copying project data using SD card or USB memory After installing BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS download the project data At this time match the version of the standard monitor OS in the GOT with the version of the standard monitor OS with which the project data was created When OS and project data are in the SD card or USB memory when using GT Designer3 When installing by pressing the upper left corner of the GOT screen project data is downloaded after completion of OS installation When installing with the utility install the OS and download the project data from their respective operation screens Installation cannot be interrupted Do not perform any of the following during a BootOS or standard monitor OS installation Failure to do so may result in installation failure causing the GOT malfunction Powering off the GOT Pressing the reset button of the GOT Turning off the SD card access switch of the G
330. the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the backup Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching the Cancel button cancels the backup The completion dialog box appears when the restoration is completed Touching the OK button closes the dialog box 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 11 GOT data package acquisition ll GOT data package acquisition function The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the SD card or USB memory OS Boot OS standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS Special data Project data The copied data can be utilized for backup or creating the same GOT system by installing the data For installation function of the GOT refer to the following gt 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory Display operation of GOT data package acquisition Main menu Program Data control L 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Time setting amp display Program datagontrol Debug amp self Program data control v Touch GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition s 05 project data are copied to the SD card This SD card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Pleas
331. tion cable Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment Current status A single ground cable is led from the panel having the control equipment O Led such as PLC to the panel having the Not led GOT Connection cable O Effective Ineffective O Effective O Ineffective 18 8 Fig A Ground cable ee Short and Ground to Connecting the ground cable to the passible by panel having the GOT as shown Fig A to reduce the potential 7 difference may prevent the malfunction When wiring as shown in Fig A is difficult perform wiring as shown in Fig B Fig B Ground cable Ground to the panel PEN KA Measure for the ground cable led Fig C Ground cable L Ferrite core Use a short and Ground to thick wire as the panel Attaching the ferrite core to the ground possible cable connected to the panel having the GOT as shown in Fig C reduces the influence of noise When wiring as shown in Fig C is difficult perform wiring as shown in Fig D Fig D Ground cable P Ferrite core Ground to q the panel 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 7 Power supply system The power from the same system is used for the GOT I O equipment such as relay and power equipment such as servo amplifier Used O Not Not used Main power pie AC2
332. tion parameters setting Description Set various communication parameters of communication devices The settable parameters differ according to the communication device Keyword Register For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set Keyword Delete For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be deleted Keyword Clear For the FX series PLCs the program protection status in the PLC can be cancelled Keyword Protect For the FX series PLCs with the 2nd keyword in use the cancelled program protection in the PLC can be reactivated 10 2 2 Display operation of Communication Detail setting ll Communication settings PTCIHICHENESHSES 1 Touch the driver display BOX of the communication Standard I F Setting parameter to be set in the Communication setting ChNo RS422 485 MELSEC FX screen 95232 Host PC USB 9 Host PC ChNo Ethernet None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External device 9 PC connection ee CH Driver assign OK Reta BERE x 2 The screen switches to the Communication Detail MELSEC FX setting screen T ission Sneed 115200 1 BPS Set communication parameters from this screen ro TIMES For the setting change operation refer to the Timeout Time SEC ee following Delay Time ms 77 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Keyword Regis
333. tion setting between the GOT and the modem and the modem operation can be executed Detail setting PC connection type Transmission Speed Init AT command Host Modem 115200 BPS 8 jBIT Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 Par ity AT amp FEORCORKORDOW2SO Modem operation Init Disc Default Item Description PC connection type Select the connection method to the PC OK Setting range Host PC Host Modem lt Default Host PC gt Transmission Speed Set the transmission speed when communicating 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 lt Default 115200 gt Data Bit Set the data bit when communicating Tbit 8bit Default 8bit gt Stop Bit Set the stop bit length when communicating 1bit 2bit Default 1bit gt Parity Set whether to execute or not the parity check during Odd Even None lt Default Odd gt communication When executing set the type of the parity check Init AT command Set the AT command for initialize the modem Default AT amp FE0 C0 amp amp DOW2S0 1 gt Touch the Init button to initialize the modem Mod ti Touch the Cut button to disconnect the line 10 10 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING keyword for FX series PLC be executed E Keyword settings of MELSEC FX On the communication detail setting screen of MEL
334. to a SD card 13 84 Password change Enables changing passwords to be used for login and logout in out of the GOT 13 85 Function setting Enables setting the automatic logout time and password expiration date 13 87 2 Display operation of operator management Main menu Debug amp self check Operator setting menu 9 3 Utility Display ER system alarm display cor start tine UI Ongrator information management Debug amp self Operator information check management Operator information management Operator information management ID Level Update 2012 07 22 2012 07 22 2012 07 22 Add Drive mef A 13 74 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Display example of operator management a Operator information management screen Operator information mana 20 2707722 2012 07 22 Delete undo Export cave No Item Description a Operator Name Displays operator names b ID Displays operator IDs c Level Displays security levels for operators d Update Displays the last updated dates of the operator information e Operation keys Execution keys for each function Drive in use Displays and sets the storage location for imported and exported operator information Touch the item and then the display switches A Built in SD card The display switches only when USB drive is i
335. to the SD card or USB memory If doing so the previous data will be unavailable COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 91 13 2 Various Data Control 13 92 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND 2 SELF CHECK 5 o z 5 i gt e The GOT can display the screen for debugging and self checking The following describes the functions available as the debugging and self checking functions Description Reference E Debug System monitor A list editor FX list editor Backup restoration 14 1 Z E z Self check Memory check Display check Touch panel check I O check Ethernet status check 14 3 3 55 System alarm display GOT error CPU error 14 19 ozo GOT start time GOT start time 14 21 o 2 Bo 14 1 Debu 225 SEIT Si i aog In this manual the overview of the debugging function is described Bu For display contents and operation procedure of debugging refer to the following manual i S GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 z 3 aif The following describes the functions available as the debugging function 28 Nn OD Item Description Reference Ez 2 e System monitor The device of PLC CPU and buffer memory of intelligent function module can be
336. to the unit Doing so may damage the unit Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using For repair of the backlight contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Replace battery with GT11 50BAT by Mitsubishi electric Co only Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION e When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to the User s Manual of the GOT to be used TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION e For the analog resistive film type touch panels normally the adjustment is not required However the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position oc
337. ton to register the input Mot reg license number If the x button is touched without touching the Regist button the license number is not registered 3 After a license number is registered touch the x button to close the license management screen x 1 Touchthe Cancel reg button to release the registered license number Registered 2 Touch the x button to close the license management screen Cancel reg VNC is a trademark of RealVNC Ltd How to acquire a license number For how to acquire a license number please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative 11 26 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 6 License Management 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY 2 STATUS DISPLAY Lr o z gt TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY E Lr 2 2 Setting items for clock display can be displayed from the GOT utility screen si z e 85 12 1 Time Setting and Display TE 8z9 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions Time settings and displaying of the status of GOT built in battery are possible b 225 Function Description Reference 9 Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and clock data of PLC CPU connected with GOT 12 2 i 2 Clock display Carry out the display and setup of GOT clock data 12 3 2 8 GOT internal battery voltage status Changing times Displays GOT internal battery vol
338. tus for a while APPENDICES 3 When corrective action other than 1 and 2 above is required System configuration check sheet If malfunction etc occurs even after checking with 1 and 2 above please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service after filling out System configuration check sheet with details about your system When sending a troubled product attach the GOT restoration sheets GOT status check sheet GOT installation status check sheet System configuration check sheet checked in this section Please keep copies of the restoration sheets 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet GOT status check sheet Check the GOT starting from 1 GOT status Proceed as instructed by Action 1 GOT status Phenomenon Cause status a Frequency when the GOT does not operate an error occurs on the screen etc Action Occurrence frequency Example Once a month Occurs always O Occurs sometimes Proceed to 1 b b Checking of the displayed error code system alarm Error code system alarm Example 460 Communication unit error Can be checked Cannot be checked Take the action for the error code system alarm or error message checked If the status does not change after the action is taken proceed to 1 c Proceed to 1 c c POWER LED O Lit in green The power is supplied normally
339. ty file name data size type version and creation date of the file 13 10 E Data check Data check of files is possible 13 10 a E a gt o POINT 258 1 Notes installing OS If the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS is installed such data on the GOT as the project data will be zg go deleted 25 5 Nn After installing the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS reinstall download necessary data Ez g eZ 2 Notes on handling OS files When the OS boot drive is set to A Built in SD card installing and uploading OS files are not available Display operation of OS information Main menu Program Data control 9 3 Utility Display Hain Menu onmunication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display Program data control lt amp a z Ed ns ae oS Q e 5 a 2 Ed 55 Jonn m 5 lO 2 Advanced Reciph OS information Logging informat i Touch Program data control OS information OS information Select drive GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK gt A Built in SD card 32 ac Sz zo C Flash Memory Select a drive and 35 operate BootOS D Internal SRAM and OS files COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 5 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of OS information OS inf
340. u GOT setup gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Meni Communication setting L Display BOT setuo Operat ion Transparent mode ER I i Progran dat Backup restoraRq setting Debug 2 self che PR Behavior of dup Ps GOT setup Touch Backup restoration setting FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Backup restoration setting Backup restoration se Drive for backup setting A Bui Id in SD card Drive for backup data A Build in SD card GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK Trig bkup setting Max of bkup data 1 50 0 No limit Enable CPU No setting CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 19 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting E Setting operation of backup restoration setting 1 Drive for backup setting drive for backup data A Touching the setting item changes the setting items Jacku stc j mm A Bui Id in SD cat Drive for backup data A Bui Id in SD card 1 Trig bkup setting Setting 2 Touchin K button defines the setting contents Max of bkup data 0 one g 9 1 50 0 No limit Touching x button returns the screen to the GOT Enable CPU No setting NO Setup screen B 2 Trigger backup settings For operations of the trigger backup setting refer to the following gt
341. uation when freezing of the screen or faulty display of the GOT has reoccurred 18 10 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm This chapter describes the error message and system alarm displayed in the GOT As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT controller or network there are two kinds system alarm and advanced system alarm For details of the system alarm and advanced system alarm refer to the following gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Error code and channel No Error codes can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information function The channel No where an error is occurring can be confirmed with the GOT special register GS262 to 264 For details of the system information and GOT special register refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 18 2 1 Error contents display This section describes the example for displaying error code and error message on GOT Popup displaying the error code and error message Advanced alarm popup display System alarm If an error occurs the error code and error message can be popup displayed on the front of the monitor screen As alarms are popup displayed regardless of the screen type the error occurred will not be overlooked QO A 1254 1254 BL 3
342. uching a drive of Select Drive displays the information of the touched drive Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder Touching a folder name of displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy Touching yw button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching 4 button scrolls up down the screen by one screen Touching a file name selects the file For operation of operating switches refer to the following G1L CSV G1L gt This section 2 Deletes This section 3 0 cessere L gt This section 4 MOV8 isnt dene L gt This section 5 L gt This section 6 Create Folder This section 7 Touching x button closes the screen 13 2 Various Data Control 13 55 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 2 Operation of G1L CSV conversion G1L TXT conversion Logging file G1L file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on PC 1 Touch and select the G1L file to convert into a ing Information CSV file or a Unicode text file Size 2 DIRI Touch the following button in accordance with GIL LOGO0001_0001 destination file type CSV file G1L CSV button
343. upper hierarchy Touching A W button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching 4 button scrolls up down the screen by one screen Touching a file name selects the file For G1A CSV G1A TXT delete copy graph operations refer to the following G1A CSV G1A gt TXT This section 2 57 This section 3 57 This section 4 Touching x button closes the screen 13 2 Various Data Control 13 13 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 14 2 G1A CSV conversion operation G1A TXT conversion operation The selected G1A file is converted to CSV file or TXT file 1 Touch and select the 1 file to convert into a CSV file or a TXT file Example When G1A CSV button is touched 2 The following dialog box is displayed when touching Source file the following button according to the file type to AAMOOO00 G1A convert to Destination file e CVS file G1A CSV Button AAMOO000 CSV Convert now e TXT file G1A TXT Button Touch OK button File is already exist When the file whose name is the same exists in the Overwrite now destination folder the dialog box shown at left appears without starting the conversion Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the conver
344. ut can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 3 When the administrator password is correctly input The import process of operator the dialog box shown left is displayed and the information file is completed 2 operator information stored in a SD card is imported to the GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 83 13 2 Various Data Control COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL f Export operation Export the operator information stored in the GOT to a SD card peratorName ID Level Update Administrator 1 1001 10 2012 07 22 OPOO02 1002 12 2012 07 22 OPOO03 1003 12 2012 07 22 OPOOQ5 1005 15 Select an output file format to export the operator information The export process overwrites existing files Do you want to proceed This saves unsaved changes The export process of operator information file is completed 1 Touch the Export button The dialog box on the left is displayed Touch the following buttons according to the output format for the file Binary file Binary button CSV file CSV button The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password
345. utility is the same as the station number set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module or in the project data Check the following contents so that the multiple station numbers should not be the same Check the GOT s station number in the GOT s utility Check the station number set in the project data Check the station number set in the Ethernet setting Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer When using the station No switching function check the data of the switching station No device 425 A duplicate IP address has been detected Confirm the setting The IP address of the GOT is the same as that of the controller Change the IP address of the GOT or the controller 448 PLC cannot handle as requested Correct devices A device outside the range of PLC file registers and the buffer memory was specified Correct the monitor device by setting file register of the PLC CPU 449 Dedicated device is out of range Confirm device range Set the address for the special function module in the GOT monitor available range Set the device in the GOT monitor available range 450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system The path has been switched or timeout occurred in the redundant system Check the PLC CPU to k
346. vironments without direct sunlight dust lamp black conductive dust corrosive gas combustible gas high temperature condensation wind rain vibrations and impacts Electric shock fire malfunction product damage or deterioration can be caused Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Also undertightening can disable waterproof or oil proof effect Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Also distortion of the GOT or the panel may disable waterproof or oil proof effect 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT Mount the GOT onto the control panel while considering the following control panel inside dimensions Vertical installation of the GOT requires a space with the same dimensions as the horizontal installation turned 90 degrees clockwise seen from the display side Applicable cable Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT Therefore consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation 30 1 19 152 5 99
347. with the same IP address as that of Do not maintain a network connection the GOT is added to the network afterwards Default Maintain a network connection rec Behavior of duplicate IPs 1 When the IP address duplication is not checked When the IP address of the GOT is set to 192 168 0 18 the IP address duplication check is not performed Depending on the device to connect with the GOT the IP address duplication check may not be performed 2 When the GOT is added to the network in which a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT exists The GOT goes into offline status and displays the following dialog box FLAN SLCOET WEF 2 Miet L PLARBRELT EEC The IP address is dupulicated Remove the communication cable and specify the IP address again after rebooting the GOT TEAL amp IAE IP Address 192 168 0 181 Address 08 00 70 38 00 60 Clear IP Address Reboot GOT When changing the IP address of another device which has the same IP address as that of the GOT After changing the IP address of another device which has the same address as that of the GOT touch the Reboot GOT button to restart the GOT When changing the IP address of the GOT Touch the Clear IP Address button to clear the IP address of the GOT After touching the Reboot GOT button to restart the GOT change the IP address of the GOT using the Utility 11 22 11 DISPLAY
348. y voltage is low For details of the system alarm display refer to the following gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low replace the battery immediately Data can be saved for about one month after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that If it exceeds a month from the voltage low detection to battery replacement the clock data or D drive Internal SRAM data may become indefinite Adjust the clock and format the D drive Internal SRAM 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement Example of alarm output to external device lamp buzzer etc The following describes an example of outputting the battery voltage low signal from a FX series PLC to an external device with system information Condition The Write Device is D20 and all data is used the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b12 Battery voltage low System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a battery voltage drop Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 MOV D36 K4M20 Battery voltage low M32 o emo Output to external device of PLC Activated the output upon battery voltage low detection indicates the output number at which the external device is connected For det
349. ymbol can not be inputted If record comment is not changed it is not need to input Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Touching the OK button starts saving record When saving is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 48 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 12 Record match operation Verifies weather selected record matches to the device value of the controller After executing loading saving with advanced recipe verifies weather its contents are reflected 1 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment for matching Setting No 2 the device value Name product2 No AttrRecord Comment amp Process 1 setting Process 2 setting Process 3 setting d Touching the Match records GOT PLC button Record No 1 displays the dialog box shown left Record Comment Process 1 setting 4 Touching the OK button starts matching record Execute record matching COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 5 When matching is completed completion dialog Matching progressed box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 6 If selected record does not match to the device Matching error value of controller the dialog box shown left is displayed 13 FILE DISPLAY A

GT14 User`s Manual - Mitsubishi Electric

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents